WO2023010349A1 - 处理方法、终端设备、网络设备及存储介质 - Google Patents

处理方法、终端设备、网络设备及存储介质 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2023010349A1
WO2023010349A1 PCT/CN2021/110634 CN2021110634W WO2023010349A1 WO 2023010349 A1 WO2023010349 A1 WO 2023010349A1 CN 2021110634 W CN2021110634 W CN 2021110634W WO 2023010349 A1 WO2023010349 A1 WO 2023010349A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
paging
group
different
reference signal
trs
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2021/110634
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
朱荣昌
黄钧蔚
Original Assignee
深圳传音控股股份有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 深圳传音控股股份有限公司 filed Critical 深圳传音控股股份有限公司
Priority to PCT/CN2021/110634 priority Critical patent/WO2023010349A1/zh
Priority to EP21937193.7A priority patent/EP4156798A4/en
Priority to CN202180012013.9A priority patent/CN115053574A/zh
Publication of WO2023010349A1 publication Critical patent/WO2023010349A1/zh

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00—Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/02—Power saving arrangements
    • H04W52/0209—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00—Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/02—Power saving arrangements
    • H04W52/0209—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices
    • H04W52/0212—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices managed by the network, e.g. network or access point is master and terminal is slave
    • H04W52/0216—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices managed by the network, e.g. network or access point is master and terminal is slave using a pre-established activity schedule, e.g. traffic indication frame
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L27/00—Modulated-carrier systems
    • H04L27/26—Systems using multi-frequency codes
    • H04L27/2601—Multicarrier modulation systems
    • H04L27/2647—Arrangements specific to the receiver only
    • H04L27/2655—Synchronisation arrangements
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00—Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/02—Power saving arrangements
    • H04W52/0209—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices
    • H04W52/0212—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices managed by the network, e.g. network or access point is master and terminal is slave
    • H04W52/0219—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices managed by the network, e.g. network or access point is master and terminal is slave where the power saving management affects multiple terminals
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W68/00—User notification, e.g. alerting and paging, for incoming communication, change of service or the like
    • H04W68/005—Transmission of information for alerting of incoming communication
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W68/00—User notification, e.g. alerting and paging, for incoming communication, change of service or the like
    • H04W68/02—Arrangements for increasing efficiency of notification or paging channel
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W68/00—User notification, e.g. alerting and paging, for incoming communication, change of service or the like
    • H04W68/02—Arrangements for increasing efficiency of notification or paging channel
    • H04W68/025—Indirect paging
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00—Connection management
    • H04W76/20—Manipulation of established connections
    • H04W76/28—Discontinuous transmission [DTX]; Discontinuous reception [DRX]
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0048—Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W56/00—Synchronisation arrangements
    • H04W56/001—Synchronization between nodes
    • Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02—TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02D—CLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES [ICT], I.E. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES AIMING AT THE REDUCTION OF THEIR OWN ENERGY USE
    • Y02D30/00—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks
    • Y02D30/70—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks in wireless communication networks

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the technical field of wireless communication, and specifically relates to a processing method, a terminal device, a network device and a storage medium.
  • the process of receiving a paging message by a user equipment includes: detecting the physical downlink control channel in the search space corresponding to the paging occasion (PO, Paging Occasion) (PDCCH, Physical Downlink Control Channel), and then analyze the downlink control information (DCI, Downlink Control Information) carrying paging scheduling information. If the DCI is successfully resolved, the scheduling based on the paging scheduling information uses Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH, Physical Downlink Share Channel1) resources to receive and demodulate the paging message.
  • PDSCH Physical Downlink Shared Channel
  • DRX discontinuous receiver
  • UE needs to detect the search space corresponding to each PO during the process of receiving paging messages, UE needs to wake up frequently, or UE time-frequency synchronization takes time Long, the UE wakes up for a long time, causing the UE to generate large power consumption.
  • the present application provides a processing method, terminal equipment, network equipment and storage medium, aiming at solving the technical problem of high power consumption and low energy saving of UE in the process of receiving paging messages.
  • Paging Early Indication Paging Early Indication
  • Paging Occasion (PO, Paging Occasion);
  • Tracking Reference Signal (TRS, Tracking Reference Signal);
  • DRX Discontinuous reception
  • PEI is an optional implementation of paging advance indication.
  • PEI is used in the following embodiments of the processing method, terminal equipment, network equipment, and computer storage medium of this application. All possible paging advance indication signals, but the paging advance indication is not limited to PEI only.
  • the paging advance indication may also be a signal with the same indication function in other systems.
  • the present application provides a processing method, which is applied to terminal equipment, and includes the following steps:
  • S30 Determine whether to monitor paging messages according to the monitoring status, and/or determine whether to perform time-frequency synchronization through TRS according to the TRS acquisition status.
  • step S10 it also includes:
  • step S00 includes:
  • the step S30 includes at least one of the following:
  • At least one TRS indicating a different PF within at least one group is available
  • Listening to at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicating at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is available and not listening to at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicating at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group available;
  • Listening to at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicating at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is available and not listening to at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicating at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group not available;
  • Not listening to at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicating at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is available and not listening to at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicating at least one of different PFs in at least one group TRS is not available.
  • step S20 includes:
  • the step S21 includes at least one of the following:
  • the PF in the configured DRX cycle is configured as a single group, analyze the indication information in the PEI before each PO in the first PF of the single group, and determine the monitoring status and/or TRS of the PO corresponding to each PF in the single group the state of acquisition;
  • the PF in the configured DRX cycle is configured as multiple groups, analyze the indication information in the PEI before each PO in the first PF of each group, and determine the listening status of the PO corresponding to each PF in each group and/or TRS acquisition status.
  • the step S21 includes at least one of the following:
  • the PF in the configured DRX cycle is configured as a single group, then analyze the indication information in the PEI before each PO in the first PF of the single group, and determine the POs corresponding to the non-contiguous multiple PFs selected by the predetermined rule of the single group The monitoring state of and/or the obtaining state of TRS;
  • the PFs in the configured DRX cycle are configured as multiple groups, analyze the indication information in the PEI before each PO in the first PF of each group, and determine the non-consecutive multiple PFs selected by the predetermined rules of each group respectively The monitoring status of the PO and/or the acquisition status of the TRS corresponding to the location.
  • step S10 includes:
  • the step S30 includes at least one of the following:
  • the identification unit monitors the PO;
  • the identification unit monitors the PO and performs TRS synchronization;
  • the identification unit does not monitor the PO;
  • the identification unit In response to the indication information in the PEI, the identification unit does not perform TRS synchronization;
  • the identification unit In response to the indication information in the PEI, the identification unit does not monitor the PO and does not perform TRS synchronization.
  • the TRS availability indication is valid only when the PO indication needs to be monitored.
  • the present application also provides a processing method applied to a terminal device, including the following steps:
  • S200 Determine whether to monitor paging messages according to the monitoring status, and/or determine whether to perform time-frequency synchronization through the TRS according to the TRS acquisition status.
  • the manner of determining or generating the group information includes at least one of the following:
  • the first number and/or the second number generate the PF of at least one group in at least one DRX cycle.
  • the meeting preset conditions includes at least one of the following:
  • At least one PF indicated by the indication information exists in the at least one group
  • the PEI carrying the indication information is located before the corresponding PO in the first PF in the same group.
  • the step S200 includes at least one of the following:
  • At least one TRS indicating a different PF within at least one group is available
  • Listening to at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicating at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is available and not listening to at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicating at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group available;
  • Listening to at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicating at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is available and not listening to at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicating at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group not available;
  • Not listening to at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicating at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is available and not listening to at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicating at least one of different PFs in at least one group TRS is not available.
  • step S100 includes:
  • the indication information determine the listening state of at least one PO of at least one PF of at least one group and/or the obtaining state of TRS in the same or different DRX cycles.
  • the step S102 includes at least one of the following:
  • the PF in the configured DRX cycle is configured as a single group, analyze the indication information in the PEI before each PO in the first PF of the single group, and determine the monitoring status and/or TRS of the PO corresponding to each PF in the single group the state of acquisition;
  • the PF in the configured DRX cycle is configured as multiple groups, analyze the indication information in the PEI before each PO in the first PF of each group, and determine the listening status of the PO corresponding to each PF in each group and/or TRS acquisition status.
  • the step S102 includes at least one of the following:
  • the PF in the configured DRX cycle is configured as a single group, then analyze the indication information in the PEI before each PO in the first PF of the single group, and determine the POs corresponding to the non-contiguous multiple PFs selected by the predetermined rule of the single group The monitoring state of and/or the obtaining state of TRS;
  • the PFs in the configured DRX cycle are configured as multiple groups, analyze the indication information in the PEI before each PO in the first PF of each group, and determine the non-consecutive multiple PFs selected by the predetermined rules of each group respectively The monitoring status of the PO and/or the acquisition status of the TRS corresponding to the location.
  • the step S200 includes at least one of the following:
  • the identification unit monitors the PO;
  • the identification unit monitors the PO and performs TRS synchronization;
  • the identification unit does not monitor the PO;
  • the identification unit In response to the indication information, the identification unit does not perform TRS synchronization;
  • the identification unit In response to the indication information, the identification unit does not monitor the PO and does not perform TRS synchronization.
  • the TRS availability indication is valid only when the PO indication needs to be monitored.
  • the present application also provides a processing method applied to network equipment, including the following steps:
  • A10 Sending the PEI to the terminal device, so that the terminal device determines the listening state of at least one PO of at least one PF and/or the obtaining state of the TRS according to the indication information in the PEI;
  • the monitoring status is used to indicate whether to monitor the paging message, and/or the acquisition status is used to indicate whether to perform time-frequency synchronization through the TRS.
  • step A10 it also includes:
  • A00 Determine the grouping status of at least one DRX cycle.
  • step A00 includes:
  • the indication information is used to indicate at least one of the following situations:
  • At least one TRS indicating a different PF within at least one group is available
  • Listening to at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicating at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is available and not listening to at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicating at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group available;
  • Listening to at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicating at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is available and not listening to at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicating at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group not available;
  • Not listening to at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicating at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is available and not listening to at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicating at least one of different PFs in at least one group TRS is not available.
  • the PEI includes at least one PO monitoring state and/or TRS acquisition state of at least one PF in the same or different DRX cycle.
  • the step A10 includes at least one of the following:
  • the PF in the configured DRX cycle is configured as a single group, send the indication information in the PEI before each PO in the first PF of the single group, indicating the monitoring status and/or TRS of the PO corresponding to each PF in the single group the state of acquisition;
  • the indication information in the PEI before each PO in the first PF of each group is sent to indicate the listening status of the PO corresponding to each PF in each group and/or TRS acquisition status.
  • the step A10 includes at least one of the following:
  • the PF in the configured DRX cycle is configured as a single group, then send the indication information in the PEI before each PO in the first PF of the single group, indicating the PO corresponding to the position of non-consecutive multiple PFs selected by the predetermined rule of the single group
  • the PFs in the configured DRX cycle are configured as multiple groups, send the indication information in the PEI before each PO in the first PF of each group, respectively indicating the non-consecutive multiple PFs selected by the predetermined rules of each group The monitoring status of the PO and/or the acquisition status of the TRS corresponding to the location.
  • step A10 includes:
  • the method includes at least one of the following:
  • Sending a tracking reference signal at a paging occasion does not send a paging message.
  • the TRS availability indication is valid only when the PO indication needs to be monitored.
  • the present application also provides a terminal device, which includes: a memory and a processor, wherein a computer program is stored in the memory, and the computer program implements the steps of the above method when executed by the processor.
  • the present application also provides a network device.
  • the network device includes: a memory and a processor, wherein a computer program is stored in the memory, and when the computer program is executed by the processor, the steps of the above-mentioned processing method are implemented. .
  • the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, where a computer program is stored on the computer-readable storage medium, and when the computer program is executed by a processor, the steps of the above method are realized.
  • the processing method of this application is applied to the terminal equipment, receives the PEI, and indicates the monitoring state of at least one PO of at least one PF and/or the obtaining state of the TRS through the PEI, and then determines whether to monitor the TRS according to the monitoring state.
  • paging message and/or, determine whether to perform time-frequency synchronization through TRS according to the acquisition state of the TRS, and reduce the number of wake-up times of the terminal device and/or shorten the wake-up time of the terminal device during the process of receiving the paging message by the terminal device, reducing the number of terminals Reduce the power consumption of the device and improve the battery life of the terminal device.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a hardware structure of a mobile terminal implementing various embodiments of the present application
  • FIG. 2 is a system architecture diagram of a communication network provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic flow diagram of an embodiment of a processing method of the present application applied to a terminal device
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a scenario in which PEI continuously indicates PO monitoring status
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of a PEI jump indicating at least one PO monitoring state of multiple PFs
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment where PEI jump indicates at least one PO monitoring state of multiple PFs
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment where PEI jump indicates at least one PO monitoring state of multiple PFs
  • Fig. 8a is the first part of the scene schematic diagram of still another embodiment in which PEI jump indicates at least one PO monitoring state of multiple PFs;
  • Fig. 8b is the second part following the first part of the schematic diagram of the scene in Fig. 8a;
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of a PEI jump indicating the acquisition status of at least one PO corresponding to a TRS of multiple PFs;
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment where PEI jump indicates the acquisition state of at least one PO corresponding to a TRS of multiple PFs;
  • Fig. 11a is a schematic diagram of a data structure of indication information of PEI
  • Figure 11b is a schematic diagram of the indication logic scene of the identification unit of PEI
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic flowchart of another embodiment of applying the processing method of the present application to a terminal device
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic flow diagram of an embodiment of the processing method of the present application applied to a network device
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of a scene of an embodiment in which PEI jump indicates at least one PO monitoring state of multiple PFs and the corresponding TRS acquisition state;
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment where PEI hopping indicates at least one PO monitoring state of multiple PFs and the corresponding TRS acquisition state;
  • Fig. 16 is a schematic diagram of a scenario of still another embodiment in which PEI hopping indicates at least one PO monitoring state of multiple PFs and the corresponding TRS acquisition state.
  • first, second, third, etc. may be used herein to describe various information, the information should not be limited to these terms. These terms are only used to distinguish information of the same type from one another. For example, first information may also be called second information, and similarly, second information may also be called first information, without departing from the scope of this document.
  • word “if” as used herein may be interpreted as “at” or “when” or “in response to a determination”.
  • the singular forms "a”, “an” and “the” are intended to include the plural forms as well, unless the context indicates otherwise.
  • A, B, C means “any of the following: A; B; C; A and B; A and C; B and C; A and B and C
  • A, B or C or "A, B and/or C” means "any of the following: A; B; C; A and B; A and C; B and C; A and B and C”. Exceptions to this definition will only arise when combinations of elements, functions, steps or operations are inherently mutually exclusive in some way.
  • the words “if”, “if” as used herein may be interpreted as “at” or “when” or “in response to determining” or “in response to detecting”.
  • the phrases “if determined” or “if detected (the stated condition or event)” could be interpreted as “when determined” or “in response to the determination” or “when detected (the stated condition or event) )” or “in response to detection of (a stated condition or event)”.
  • step codes such as S10 and S20 are used, the purpose of which is to express the corresponding content more clearly and concisely, and does not constitute a substantive limitation on the order.
  • S20 will be executed first, followed by S10, etc., but these should be within the scope of protection of this application.
  • the terminal device may be a mobile terminal, and the mobile terminal may be implemented in various forms.
  • the mobile terminals described in this application may include mobile phones, tablet computers, notebook computers, palmtop computers, personal digital assistants (Personal Digital Assistant, PDA), portable media players (Portable Media Player, PMP), navigation devices, Mobile terminals such as wearable devices, smart bracelets, and pedometers, and fixed terminals such as digital TVs and desktop computers.
  • PDA Personal Digital Assistant
  • PMP portable media players
  • Navigation devices Mobile terminals such as wearable devices, smart bracelets, and pedometers
  • Mobile terminals such as wearable devices, smart bracelets, and pedometers
  • fixed terminals such as digital TVs and desktop computers.
  • a mobile terminal will be taken as an example, and those skilled in the art will understand that, in addition to elements specially used for mobile purposes, the configurations according to the embodiments of the present application can also be applied to fixed-type terminals.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a mobile terminal implementing various embodiments of the present application.
  • the mobile terminal 100 may include: an RF (Radio Frequency, radio frequency) unit 101, a WiFi module 102, an audio output unit 103, an A /V (audio/video) input unit 104, sensor 105, display unit 106, user input unit 107, interface unit 108, memory 109, processor 110, and power supply 111 and other components.
  • RF Radio Frequency, radio frequency
  • the radio frequency unit 101 can be used for sending and receiving information or receiving and sending signals during a call. Specifically, after receiving the downlink information of the base station, it is processed by the processor 110; in addition, the uplink data is sent to the base station.
  • the radio frequency unit 101 includes, but is not limited to, an antenna, at least one amplifier, a transceiver, a coupler, a low noise amplifier, a duplexer, and the like.
  • the radio frequency unit 101 may also communicate with a network and other devices through wireless communication.
  • the above wireless communication can use any communication standard or protocol, including but not limited to GSM (Global System of Mobile communication, Global System for Mobile Communications), GPRS (General Packet Radio Service, General Packet Radio Service), CDMA2000 (Code Division Multiple Access 2000 , Code Division Multiple Access 2000), WCDMA (Wideband Code Division Multiple Access, Wideband Code Division Multiple Access), TD-SCDMA (Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access, Time Division Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access), FDD-LTE (Frequency Division Duplexing-Long Term Evolution, frequency division duplex long-term evolution) and TDD-LTE (Time Division Duplexing-Long Term Evolution, time-division duplex long-term evolution), etc.
  • GSM Global System of Mobile communication, Global System for Mobile Communications
  • GPRS General Packet Radio Service
  • CDMA2000 Code Division Multiple Access 2000
  • WCDMA Wideband Code Division Multiple Access
  • TD-SCDMA Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access, Time Division Synchronous Code Division
  • WiFi is a short-distance wireless transmission technology.
  • the mobile terminal can help users send and receive emails, browse web pages, and access streaming media through the WiFi module 102, which provides users with wireless broadband Internet access.
  • Fig. 1 shows the WiFi module 102, it can be understood that it is not an essential component of the mobile terminal, and can be completely omitted as required without changing the essence of the invention.
  • the audio output unit 103 can store the audio received by the radio frequency unit 101 or the WiFi module 102 or in the memory 109 when the mobile terminal 100 is in a call signal receiving mode, a call mode, a recording mode, a voice recognition mode, a broadcast receiving mode, or the like.
  • the audio data is converted into an audio signal and output as sound.
  • the audio output unit 103 can also provide audio output related to a specific function performed by the mobile terminal 100 (eg, call signal reception sound, message reception sound, etc.).
  • the audio output unit 103 may include a speaker, a buzzer, and the like.
  • the A/V input unit 104 is used to receive audio or video signals.
  • the A/V input unit 104 may include a graphics processing unit (Graphics Processing Unit, GPU) 1041 and a microphone 1042, and the graphics processing unit 1041 is used for still pictures or The image data of the video is processed.
  • the processed image frames may be displayed on the display unit 106 .
  • the image frames processed by the graphics processor 1041 may be stored in the memory 109 (or other storage media) or sent via the radio frequency unit 101 or the WiFi module 102 .
  • the microphone 1042 can receive sound (audio data) via the microphone 1042 in a phone call mode, a recording mode, a voice recognition mode, and the like operating modes, and can process such sound as audio data.
  • the processed audio (voice) data can be converted into a format transmittable to a mobile communication base station via the radio frequency unit 101 for output in case of a phone call mode.
  • the microphone 1042 may implement various types of noise cancellation (or suppression) algorithms to cancel (or suppress) noise or interference generated in the process of receiving and transmitting audio signals.
  • the mobile terminal 100 also includes at least one sensor 105, such as a light sensor, a motion sensor, and other sensors.
  • the light sensor includes an ambient light sensor and a proximity sensor.
  • the ambient light sensor can adjust the brightness of the display panel 1061 according to the brightness of the ambient light, and the proximity sensor can turn off the display when the mobile terminal 100 moves to the ear. panel 1061 and/or backlight.
  • the accelerometer sensor can detect the magnitude of acceleration in various directions (generally three axes), and can detect the magnitude and direction of gravity when it is stationary, and can be used to identify the application of mobile phone posture (such as horizontal and vertical screen switching, related Games, magnetometer attitude calibration), vibration recognition related functions (such as pedometer, tap), etc.; as for mobile phones, fingerprint sensors, pressure sensors, iris sensors, molecular sensors, gyroscopes, barometers, hygrometers, Other sensors such as thermometers and infrared sensors will not be described in detail here.
  • the display unit 106 is used to display information input by the user or information provided to the user.
  • the display unit 106 may include a display panel 1061, and the display panel 1061 may be configured in the form of a liquid crystal display (Liquid Crystal Display, LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (Organic Light-Emitting Diode, OLED), or the like.
  • LCD Liquid Crystal Display
  • OLED Organic Light-Emitting Diode
  • the user input unit 107 can be used to receive input numbers or character information, and generate key signal input related to user settings and function control of the mobile terminal.
  • the user input unit 107 may include a touch panel 1071 and other input devices 1072 .
  • the touch panel 1071 also referred to as a touch screen, can collect touch operations of the user on or near it (for example, the user uses any suitable object or accessory such as a finger or a stylus on the touch panel 1071 or near the touch panel 1071). operation), and drive the corresponding connection device according to the preset program.
  • the touch panel 1071 may include two parts: a touch detection device and a touch controller.
  • the touch detection device detects the user's touch orientation, detects the signal brought by the touch operation, and transmits the signal to the touch controller; the touch controller receives touch information from the touch detection device and converts it into contact coordinates , and then sent to the processor 110, and can receive the command sent by the processor 110 and execute it.
  • the touch panel 1071 may be realized by various types such as resistive, capacitive, infrared, and surface acoustic wave.
  • the user input unit 107 may also include other input devices 1072 .
  • other input devices 1072 may include, but are not limited to, one or more of physical keyboards, function keys (such as volume control buttons, switch buttons, etc.), trackballs, mice, joysticks, etc., which are not specifically described here. limited.
  • the touch panel 1071 may cover the display panel 1061.
  • the touch panel 1071 detects a touch operation on or near it, it transmits to the processor 110 to determine the type of the touch event, and then the processor 110 determines the touch event according to the touch event.
  • the corresponding visual output is provided on the display panel 1061 .
  • the touch panel 1071 and the display panel 1061 are used as two independent components to realize the input and output functions of the mobile terminal, in some embodiments, the touch panel 1071 and the display panel 1061 can be integrated.
  • the implementation of the input and output functions of the mobile terminal is not specifically limited here.
  • the interface unit 108 serves as an interface through which at least one external device can be connected with the mobile terminal 100 .
  • an external device may include a wired or wireless headset port, an external power (or battery charger) port, a wired or wireless data port, a memory card port, a port for connecting a device with an identification module, audio input/output (I/O) ports, video I/O ports, headphone ports, and more.
  • the interface unit 108 can be used to receive input from an external device (for example, data information, power, etc.) transfer data between devices.
  • the memory 109 can be used to store software programs as well as various data.
  • the memory 109 can mainly include a storage program area and a storage data area.
  • the storage program area can store an operating system, at least one function required application program (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.) etc.;
  • the storage data area can be Store data (such as audio data, phone book, etc.) created according to the use of the mobile phone.
  • the memory 109 may include a high-speed random access memory, and may also include a non-volatile memory, such as at least one magnetic disk storage device, flash memory device, or other volatile solid-state storage devices.
  • the processor 110 is the control center of the mobile terminal, and uses various interfaces and lines to connect various parts of the entire mobile terminal, by running or executing software programs and/or modules stored in the memory 109, and calling data stored in the memory 109 , execute various functions of the mobile terminal and process data, so as to monitor the mobile terminal as a whole.
  • the processor 110 may include one or more processing units; preferably, the processor 110 may integrate an application processor and a modem processor.
  • the application processor mainly processes operating systems, user interfaces, and application programs, etc.
  • the demodulation processor mainly handles wireless communication. It can be understood that the foregoing modem processor may not be integrated into the processor 110 .
  • the mobile terminal 100 can also include a power supply 111 (such as a battery) for supplying power to various components.
  • a power supply 111 (such as a battery) for supplying power to various components.
  • the power supply 111 can be logically connected to the processor 110 through a power management system, so as to manage charging, discharging, and power consumption through the power management system. and other functions.
  • the mobile terminal 100 may also include a Bluetooth module, etc., which will not be repeated here.
  • the following describes the communication network system on which the mobile terminal of the present application is based.
  • Fig. 2 is a kind of communication network system architecture diagram that the embodiment of the present application provides, and this communication network system is the LTE system of general mobile communication technology, and this LTE system includes the UE (User Equipment, user equipment) that communication connects sequentially ) 201, E-UTRAN (Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network, Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network) 202, EPC (Evolved Packet Core, Evolved Packet Core Network) 203 and the operator's IP service 204.
  • UE User Equipment, user equipment
  • E-UTRAN Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network
  • EPC Evolved Packet Core, Evolved Packet Core Network
  • the UE 201 may be the above-mentioned terminal 100, which will not be repeated here.
  • E-UTRAN 202 includes eNodeB 2021 and other eNodeB 2022 and so on.
  • the eNodeB 2021 can be connected to other eNodeB 2022 through a backhaul (for example, X2 interface), the eNodeB 2021 is connected to the EPC 203 , and the eNodeB 2021 can provide access from the UE 201 to the EPC 203 .
  • a backhaul for example, X2 interface
  • EPC203 may include MME (Mobility Management Entity, Mobility Management Entity) 2031, HSS (Home Subscriber Server, Home Subscriber Server) 2032, other MME2033, SGW (Serving Gate Way, Serving Gateway) 2034, PGW (PDN Gate Way, packet data Network Gateway) 2035 and PCRF (Policy and Charging Rules Function, Policy and Charging Functional Entity) 2036, etc.
  • MME2031 is a control node that processes signaling between UE201 and EPC203, and provides bearer and connection management.
  • HSS2032 is used to provide some registers to manage functions such as home location register (not shown in the figure), and save some user-specific information about service features and data rates.
  • PCRF2036 is the policy and charging control policy decision point of service data flow and IP bearer resources, it is the policy and charging execution function A unit (not shown) selects and provides available policy and charging control decisions.
  • the IP service 204 may include Internet, Intranet, IMS (IP Multimedia Subsystem, IP Multimedia Subsystem) or other IP services.
  • IMS IP Multimedia Subsystem, IP Multimedia Subsystem
  • LTE system is used as an example above, those skilled in the art should know that this application is not only applicable to the LTE system, but also applicable to other wireless communication systems, such as GSM, CDMA2000, WCDMA, TD-SCDMA and future new wireless communication systems.
  • the network system, etc. are not limited here.
  • the processing method of this application can be applied to the processing and transmission process of paging messages and/or paging indications.
  • the application scenario of the processing method of this application can be a wireless communication system, and the wireless communication system can be a communication based on cellular mobile communication technology. system, the wireless communication system may include: several terminal devices and several network devices, and the network devices are generally base stations.
  • the terminal device may be a device that provides voice and/or data connectivity to the user.
  • the terminal device can communicate with one or more core networks through a radio access network (Radio Access Network, RAN), and the terminal device can also be an IoT terminal, such as a sensor device, a mobile terminal, and a computer with an IoT terminal, for example, It may be a fixed, portable, pocket, hand-held, built-in computer, or vehicle-mounted device.
  • RAN Radio Access Network
  • the terminal device may also be a device of an unmanned aerial vehicle.
  • the terminal device may also be a vehicle-mounted device, for example, it may be a trip computer with a wireless communication function, or a wireless communication device connected externally to the trip computer.
  • the terminal device may also be a roadside device, for example, it may be a street lamp, a signal lamp, or other roadside devices with a wireless communication function.
  • the base station may be a network-side device in a wireless communication system.
  • the wireless communication system may be a fourth generation mobile communication (4th generation mobile communication, 4G) system, also known as Long Term Evolution (LTE). system; or, the wireless communication system may also be a 5G system, also known as a new air interface (new radio, NR) system or a 5G NR system.
  • the wireless communication system may also be a next-generation system of the 5G system.
  • the access network in the 5G system may be called NG-RAN (New Generation-Radio Access Network, new generation radio access network).
  • the base station may be an evolved base station (eNB) used in a 4G system.
  • the base station may also be a base station (gNB) adopting a centralized distributed architecture in the 5G system.
  • eNB evolved base station
  • gNB base station
  • the base station adopts a centralized distributed architecture it usually includes a centralized unit (central unit, CU) and at least two distributed units (distributed unit, DU).
  • the centralized unit is provided with a packet data convergence protocol (Packet Data Convergence Protocol, PDCP) layer, radio link layer control protocol (Radio Link Control, RLC) layer, media access control (Media Access Control, MAC) layer protocol stack;
  • PDCP Packet Data Convergence Protocol
  • RLC Radio Link Control
  • MAC media access control
  • a physical (Physical, PHY) layer protocol stack is set in the unit, and the embodiment of the present disclosure does not limit the specific implementation manner of the base station.
  • a wireless connection can be established between the base station and the terminal device through a wireless air interface.
  • the wireless air interface is a wireless air interface based on the fourth-generation mobile communication network technology (4G) standard; or, the wireless air interface is a wireless air interface based on the fifth-generation mobile communication network technology (5G) standard, such as
  • the wireless air interface is a new air interface; alternatively, the wireless air interface may also be a wireless air interface based on a technical standard of a next-generation mobile communication network.
  • an E2E (End to End, end-to-end) connection can also be established between terminal devices.
  • V2V Vehicle to Vehicle
  • V2I Vehicle to Infrastructure, vehicle-to-roadside equipment
  • V2P Vehicle to Pedestrian, vehicle-to-person communication in Vehicle to everything (V2X) communication Wait for the scene.
  • the foregoing wireless communication system may further include a network management device.
  • the network management device may be a core network device in the wireless communication system, for example, the network management device may be a mobility management entity (Mobility Management Entity, MME).
  • MME Mobility Management Entity
  • the network management device can also be other core network devices, such as Serving GateWay (SGW), Public Data Network Gateway (Public Data Network GateWay, PGW), policy and charging rule functional unit (Policy and Charging Rules Function, PCRF) or Home Subscriber Server (Home Subscriber Server, HSS), etc.
  • SGW Serving GateWay
  • PGW Public Data Network Gateway
  • Policy and Charging Rules Function Policy and Charging Rules Function
  • PCRF Policy and Charging Rules Function
  • HSS Home Subscriber Server
  • Executors involved in the disclosed embodiments of the present application include, but are not limited to: UEs such as mobile phone terminals supporting cellular mobile communications, and/or network devices such as base stations.
  • the terminal device may be a UE, and the network device may be a base station.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control, radio resource control
  • UE in idle/inactive state needs to confirm whether it needs to decode paging PDCCH (Physical Downlink Control Channel) by monitoring PO (Paging Occasion, paging opportunity) in each paging cycle , Physical Downlink Control Channel)/PDSCH (Physical Downlink Share Channel1, Physical Downlink Shared Channel).
  • PDCCH Physical Downlink Control Channel
  • PO Paging Occasion, paging opportunity
  • PDSCH Physical Downlink Share Channel1, Physical Downlink Shared Channel
  • a PEI may be used to indicate whether at least one PO needs to be monitored, for example, a DCI (Downlink Control Information, downlink control information)-based PEI may be used to indicate whether at least one PO needs to be monitored.
  • DCI Downlink Control Information, downlink control information
  • the PEI is used to indicate whether the PO is monitoring, how does a PEI indicate the monitoring status of at least one PO in the DRX cycle, and the PEI indicates how the design can reduce the number of times the UE is woken up as much as possible, thereby reducing energy consumption; and/or ,
  • the purpose of paging is to send paging information (Paging message) to the terminal, notify system message changes and emergency messages (ETWS/CMAS indications), the terminal device only listens to CN (Core Network, core network) in the RRC_IDLE state (discontinuous reception state) Initiated (CN-initiated) paging information, the terminal device is in RRC_IDLE state or RRC_INACTIVE state (sleeping state), monitors CN-initiated (CN-initiated) paging information and monitors RAN (Radio Access Network, radio access network) RAN-initiated paging information.
  • CN Core Network, core network
  • RRC_IDLE state discontinuous reception state
  • Initiated (CN-initiated) paging information the terminal device is in RRC_IDLE state or RRC_INACTIVE state (sleeping state)
  • RAN Radio
  • the terminal device in the RRC_IDLE state or RRC_INACTIVE state does not need to monitor the paging channel (paging channel) all the time, but monitors a PO with the shortest DRX cycle configured by the network, so a paging cycle can also be called Paging DRX.
  • the DRX of the network configuration includes the following three types:
  • Terminal specific cycle configured by NAS (Non-Access Stratum, non-access stratum) signaling.
  • the terminal specific cycle (UE-specific cycle): configured by RRC (Radio Resource Control, radio resource control) signaling, and the terminal device selects the shortest configuration cycle according to the current RRC state.
  • the period is the monitoring period. That is, the terminal device needs to select the shortest cycle from "Default Cycle” or "UE Specific Cycle” in RRC_IDLE, and when the terminal device is in the RRC_INACTIVE state, select the shortest cycle from the above three cycles.
  • the terminal device Regardless of the paging initiated by the core network or the wireless network, the terminal device confirms the paging occasion according to the same "UE_ID” (identification (ID, Identity document) of the paging message).
  • the terminal device monitors and detects whether there is a PDCCH scrambled by the P-RNTI at the paging occasion it belongs to to confirm whether it carries the paging message: if so, then further parses (decodes) the paging message sent on the PDSCH ( Paging message).
  • the present application provides a processing method applied to a terminal device (ie UE).
  • the processing method includes the following steps:
  • S30 Determine whether to monitor paging messages according to the monitoring status, and/or determine whether to perform time-frequency synchronization through TRS according to the TRS acquisition status.
  • the terminal device When the terminal device receives the paging message, the terminal device obtains the PEI of the corresponding PO in each PF at a fixed position in front of each PO in the first PF of each group, and the PEI includes at least one kind of indication information.
  • the indication information may be used to indicate the monitoring state of the PO in at least one PF (Paging Frame, paging frame) after the current moment and the current moment, that is, the indication information may indicate in advance whether the PO in at least one PF Monitoring is required.
  • the terminal device can know the monitoring status of POs in at least one subsequent PF in advance according to the indication information. Wake up at the paging occasion for monitoring, so the terminal device can be awakened in a targeted manner according to the indication information in the PEI and the monitoring status of the PO, so as to avoid frequent wakeup at each paging occasion for search space detection, and then realize the terminal device Power saving.
  • the indication information may also be used to indicate the acquisition status of the TRS (Tracking Reference Signal, Tracking Reference Signal) corresponding to the PO in at least one PF after the current moment and the current moment, that is, the indication information may indicate in advance at least Whether the TRS of a PO in a PF can be obtained.
  • the terminal device After receiving the PEI, the terminal device knows in advance the acquisition status of the TRS corresponding to the PO in at least one subsequent PF according to the indication information.
  • Auxiliary time-frequency synchronization is performed through TRS to quickly realize downlink synchronization and complete PO demodulation. In this way, the number of SSBs used by the terminal device for downlink synchronization can be reduced, the synchronization duration of the terminal device can be shortened, and the power consumption of the terminal device can be reduced.
  • the terminal device may only need to parse one SSB, and if there is no TRS for assisted time-frequency synchronization, it may need to parse three SSBs to reduce the number of SSBs used for downlink synchronization, which can be Shorten the downlink synchronization time, thereby reducing the wake-up time of terminal devices.
  • the indication information may indicate the listening status of POs in at least one PF and the corresponding TRS acquisition status at the previous time and after the current time, that is, the indication information may indicate in advance whether POs in at least one PF need to be monitored And whether the corresponding TRS can be obtained, after the terminal device receives the PEI, it can know the monitoring status of the PO in at least one subsequent PF in advance according to the indication information, and the terminal device can continue to sleep at subsequent paging opportunities that do not need to be monitored.
  • the following paging occasions that need to be monitored are awakened, so as to avoid frequent awakening and search space detection at each paging occasion, increase the sleep time of paging occasions, and reduce the power consumption of terminal equipment.
  • the indication information may also indicate in advance whether the TRS corresponding to the PO in at least one PF is available, especially for indicating in advance whether the TRS corresponding to the PO that at least one PF needs to monitor is available.
  • the terminal device can choose to use TRS to perform auxiliary time-frequency synchronization to shorten the time for the terminal device to perform PO demodulation, thereby realizing power saving of the terminal device.
  • the PEI is received, and the monitoring status of at least one PO of at least one PF and/or the TRS acquisition status of at least one PF are determined through the indication information in the PEI, and then whether to monitor the paging message is determined according to the monitoring status, and/or , determining whether to perform time-frequency synchronization through the TRS according to the TRS acquisition state, and reducing the number of terminal device wake-ups and/or reducing the terminal device wake-up time during the terminal device receiving the paging message, thereby reducing the power consumption of the terminal device.
  • TRS/CSI-RS can be used for UE to obtain channel status, beam management, mobility management and rate matching, etc.
  • the frequency of the base station and the UE physical crystal oscillator will have a small deviation, which cannot be completely consistent. This makes the RF carrier signal received by the UE have a phase deviation.
  • On the demodulated symbol constellation diagram of the received subcarrier It is manifested as a phase rotation, that is, the received modulation symbol deviates from a certain phase angle, which is caused by the accumulation of frequency deviation in time. At this time, TRS is needed to track the rotation phase of other data signals.
  • TRS is a multi-period TRS/CSI-RS, exactly a 4-1 port, 3 TRS/CSI-RS density, NZP-TRS/CSI-RS located in two consecutive time slots, in one time
  • the minimum interval between two TRSs in the slot time is 4 OFDM symbols, and the interval in the domain is 4 subcarriers. Errors in frequency and time can be estimated from the TRS.
  • the received data compensates for these errors, ie, the original transmitted modulation coordinate position is rotated back.
  • the shared TRS/CSI-RS may be a TRS/CSI-RS shared by the UE in the idle state and/or the UE in the inactive state with the UE in the connected state.
  • the idle state UE and/or the inactive state UE, and the connected state UE can monitor the TRS/CSI-RS at the shared TRS/CSI-RS opportunity.
  • the shared TRS/CSI-RS can also be used for downlink synchronization between the UE and the base station. After the downlink synchronization is completed, the UE can receive the downlink signal of the base station.
  • the UE in the RRC_IDLE state or RRC_INACTIVE state of the terminal equipment supports the TRS/CSI-RS function, so as to better realize the synchronization function, and then better realize PO demodulation.
  • This application supports TRS/CSI-RS acquisition indication through PEI (that is, TRS related indication information in PEI), and supports one PEI to support TRS/CSI-RS acquisition indication corresponding to at least one PO.
  • PEI that is, TRS related indication information in PEI
  • TRS/CSI-RS acquisition indication corresponding to at least one PO.
  • a PEI indicates the acquisition status of the TRS/CSI-RS corresponding to at least one PF, which is better than placing a PEI before each PO of each PF Indicating the acquisition status of TRS/CSI-RS saves signal resources; at the same time, TRS/CSI-RS can also be used to assist downlink synchronization and shorten the PO demodulation time.
  • the manner in which the PEI jump indicates the obtaining state of the TRS is basically the same as that of the PEI jump indicating the listening state of the PO.
  • the indication information of a PEI can indicate at least one continuous PO in the PF, but this way of continuously indicating at least one PO occupies the available resources of the PEI, such as the PEI is a DCI-based PEI (Paging indication is carried by means of DCI bit mapping), and PEI continuously indicates at least one PO to waste DCI bit resources.
  • a PF has 12 POs and continuously indicates 12 PFs, it needs 144bit, resulting in a waste of bits; if the PEI is SSS-based PEI (carrying PEI through SSS (Secondary Synchronization Signa1, secondary synchronization signal) reference signal mapping) or TRS-based PEI, based on SSS sequence or TRS sequence, you need 144 sequences are used to realize the indication of continuous POs, resulting in a waste of sequences.
  • SSS-based PEI carrier PEI through SSS (Secondary Synchronization Signa1, secondary synchronization signal) reference signal mapping
  • TRS-based PEI based on SSS sequence or TRS sequence
  • a PEI indication information jump indicates at least one PO monitoring status and/or TRS acquisition status of each PF preset mapping position in at least one PF, and the preset mapping position It may be the same position in each PF (that is, the ordering position of the PO in the PF is the same), that is, the indication information is used to indicate the listening status of at least one PO in the same position of the PF.
  • it may be as follows at least one of:
  • the indication information of the first PEI of the first PF jump indication the first PO of the first PF, the first PO of the second PF, and the first PO of the third PF;
  • the indication information of the second PEI of the first PF jump indication the second PO of the first PF, the second PO of the second PF, and the second PO of the third PF;
  • the indication information of the third PEI of the first PF jumps to indicate: the third PO of the first PF, the third PO of the second PF, and the third PO of the third PF.
  • the preset mapping position may also be a different position in each PF, as long as the PEI completes jump instructions for all POs in at least one PF.
  • the indication information of PEI jumps to indicate the PO at the position where the sorting position in at least one PF increases one by one until it traverses all the POs in the indicated PF, that is, the indication information is used to indicate the listening status of POs in different positions of at least one PF, in a possible
  • it may be at least one of the following:
  • the indication information of the first PEI of the first PF jumps indication: the first PO of the first PF, the second PO of the second PF, and the third PO of the third PF;
  • the indication information of the second PEI of the first PF jumps indication: the second PO of the first PF, the third PO of the second PF, and the first PO of the third PF;
  • the indication information of the third PEI of the first PF jumps to indicate: the third PO of the first PF, the first PO of the second PF, and the second PO of the third PF.
  • non-same positions which may include but not limited to three PFs, and also includes but not limited to three POs for each PF.
  • the indication information of one PEI skips to indicate at least one PO at a preset mapping position of each PF in at least one PF, which saves available signal resources of the PEI.
  • PEI takes DCI-based PEI as an example. There are 2 PFs, and each PF has 4 POs. If one PEI continuously indicates 2 PFs, 8 DCI bits are required. But through a PEI jump to indicate the first PO of 2 PFs, the 2 PFs only need 2 DCI bits.
  • PEI uses SSS-based PEI or TRS-based PEI to perform multiple PF jumps to indicate POs, and the same Ability to save sequence resources.
  • the PO indicating the preset mapping position of each PF in at least one PF can be skipped through the indication information of a PEI, which can save DCI bit or reference signal sequence, that is, the PEI jump indicates PO, which can save signal resources for indication.
  • the PEI jump indicates the listening status of at least one PO and the TRS acquisition status of each PF preset mapping position in at least one PF.
  • the monitoring status may include at least one of the following: monitoring, no need to monitor, or partial monitoring and part no need to monitor, and/or, the acquisition status may include at least one of the following: available, unavailable or partially available Available and partially unobtainable.
  • the indication information of PEI before PO0 of PF0 jumps to indicate PO0 from PF0 to PF3, the indication information of PEI before PO1 of PF0 jumps to indicate PO1 from PF0 to PF3, and the indication information of PEI before PO2 of PF0 jumps to indicate PO2 from PF0 to PF3, and the indication information of PF0
  • the indication information of PEI before PO3 jumps to indicate PO3 of PF0 to PF3, PF0 to PF3 are in the same DRX cycle, and PF0 to PF3 are also in the same group.
  • the PFs of multiple DRX cycles belong to one or more groups, and the skip indication logic of the indication information of the PEI is basically the same, which will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal device In a scenario where the paging rate is very low, the terminal device only knows at least one PO of a part of PFs in a DRX cycle. monitoring status and/or whether to perform time-frequency synchronization through TRS. Unnecessary wake-up times and/or unnecessary wake-up time can only be avoided for at least one PO of a small part of PFs in one DRX cycle, and the purpose of better power consumption reduction cannot be achieved.
  • the processing method before the step S10, the processing method further includes:
  • the terminal device Before receiving the PEI, the terminal device can first determine the group status of the PF.
  • a PEI can indicate the monitoring status of at least one PO of multiple PFs in a group and/or the acquisition status of TRS. For example, a PEI indicates the status of multiple PFs in a group.
  • the POs at the preset mapping positions can be that PFs in one DRX cycle form one group, or that PFs in one DRX cycle form multiple groups, or that PFs in multiple DRX cycles form one group.
  • each PEI Since the indication information of a PEI jumps to indicate the discontinuous POs of multiple PFs in a group, each PEI is only used to indicate the monitoring status and/or TRS acquisition status of a PO of each PF in a group, so each PEI It can indicate the PF of the entire or most of the DRX cycle, so that in the scenario where the terminal device is in a low paging rate, it only needs to analyze the Ns POs in the first PF in the group (each PF corresponds to Ns POs), It is possible to know the listening status of Ns POs in the PF in one DRX cycle or multiple DRX cycles and/or the acquisition status of TRS, so as to prevent the terminal device from being woken up at the paging opportunity that does not need to be monitored, so that the terminal device can be used for a longer period of time.
  • the time is in a dormant state, thereby reducing power consumption; and/or the terminal device obtains the TRS corresponding to the PO according to the PEI, and uses the TRS for auxiliary time-frequency synchronization to shorten the wake-up time, thereby saving power consumption.
  • the indication information of the PEI may indicate the TRS of each PF in group 1 and group 2 .
  • the design diagram of the embodiment is only used to represent the scheduling process, and does not indicate that the scheduled PFs are scheduled in parallel, that is, PF0, PF1, ..., PF63 are arranged in chronological order.
  • the grouping method and the indication method of PEI hopping indicating TRS in Fig. 10 are also applicable to Fig. 7, Fig. 8a and Fig. 8b. In Fig. 7, Fig. 8a and Fig. 8b, the PEI can simultaneously indicate the acquisition status of the TRS corresponding to the PO.
  • PEI jumps can be added in Figure 10 to indicate the monitoring status of at least one PO of each group of PFs.
  • PEI jumps indicate that each PF in each group corresponds to The monitoring status of the PO and the acquisition status of the TRS of the location.
  • the PEI is located before the corresponding PO in the first PF in the same group, and at least one PF indicated by the indication information exists in the at least one group.
  • the terminal device is in the RRC idle or RRC INACTIVE state, while the terminal device is listening to the paging message,
  • the terminal device If there is only one packet in a DRX cycle, place a PEI before the Ns POs of the first PF in a DRX cycle, and the indication information of this PEI indicates the corresponding position of each PF in the entire DRX cycle Whether the PO needs to be monitored and/or whether to perform auxiliary time-frequency synchronization through TRS. If there is no need to monitor, the terminal device directly skips the POs that do not need to be monitored, stays dormant, and wakes up only when the paging occasion that needs to be monitored is awakened to perform PDCCH monitoring, and/or when the PO needs to be monitored and the TRS indicated by the PEI is available, Auxiliary time-frequency synchronization via TRS.
  • a DRX cycle contains multiple groups, place a PEI before the Ns PO monitoring of the first PF of each group, and the indication information of this PEI indicates the corresponding position of each PF of each group Whether the PO needs to be monitored and/or whether to perform auxiliary time-frequency synchronization through TRS. If no monitoring is required, the terminal device directly skips the PO that does not need to be monitored, keeps sleeping, and only wakes up at the PO position that needs to be monitored for PDCCH monitoring, and/or Or when the PO needs to monitor and the TRS indicated by the PEI is available, the TRS is used to assist in time-frequency synchronization.
  • the step S00 includes: determining the PF of at least one group in at least one DRX cycle according to the first number and/or the second number.
  • the first number is the number of PFs included in the DRX cycle
  • the second number is the number of identifiers that carry the indication information of the PEI. According to the first number and/or the second number, determine which paging frames in the DRX cycle the PF of at least one group in at least one DRX cycle is, for example, determine the number L of PFs in a group according to the first number and the second number.
  • the first number is N
  • the second number is G
  • the total number of radio frames in one DRX cycle is T.
  • N the number of PFs in a group
  • N>L a classification indication can be made for each L PF to form a group.
  • the design diagram of the embodiment is only used to represent the scheduling process, and does not indicate that the scheduled PFs are scheduled in parallel, that is, PF0, PF1, ..., PF63 are arranged in chronological order.
  • the step S30 includes at least one of the following:
  • At least one TRS indicating a different PF within at least one group is available
  • Listening to at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicating at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is available and not listening to at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicating at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group available;
  • Listening to at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicating at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is available and not listening to at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicating at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group not available;
  • Not listening to at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicating at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is available and not listening to at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicating at least one of different PFs in at least one group TRS is not available.
  • step S30 further detailed instructions are as follows:
  • the indication information of the PEI may indicate that the terminal device performs assisted time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group, that is, the acquisition status of at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is available,
  • the terminal device can perform auxiliary time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group according to the obtained state, so as to reduce the time-consuming time of time-frequency synchronization and reduce the power consumption of the terminal device.
  • the indication information of the PEI may instruct the terminal device to monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group, that is, the monitoring state of at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group is monitoring, and the terminal device can monitor according to the monitoring status , monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group, and do not monitor POs whose monitoring status is no need to monitor, reduce the number of wake-ups of the terminal device, and reduce the power consumption of the terminal device.
  • the indication information of the PEI may instruct the terminal device to monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and perform assisted time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group, that is, different PFs in at least one group
  • the listening state of at least one PO of the PF is monitoring and the obtaining state of at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is available.
  • the terminal device can monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group according to the monitoring status, reduce the number of wake-ups of the terminal device, and the terminal device can perform auxiliary time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group according to the obtained status, Reduce the time-consuming time-frequency synchronization and reduce the power consumption of terminal equipment.
  • the indication information of the PEI may indicate that the terminal device does not perform assisted time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group, that is, the acquisition status of at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is unavailable , the terminal device does not perform auxiliary time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group.
  • the indication information of the PEI may indicate that the terminal device does not monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group, that is, the monitoring status of at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group is no need to monitor, and the terminal device does not monitor At least one PO of a different PF within at least one group.
  • the indication information of the PEI may indicate that the terminal device does not monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and does not perform auxiliary time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group, that is, at least one group
  • the monitoring status of at least one PO of different PFs in the group is no need to monitor and the acquisition status of at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is not available, the terminal device does not monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and is not based on at least one At least one TRS of different PFs in the group performs auxiliary time-frequency synchronization.
  • the PEI indication information may instruct the terminal device to monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and not to monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group, that is, multiple POs of different PFs in at least one group
  • the monitoring state of the PO is partially monitored and partially not required, and the terminal device monitors at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and does not monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group.
  • the indication information of the PEI may instruct the terminal device to perform assisted time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group and not to perform assisted time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group, That is, the acquisition status of multiple TRSs of different PFs in at least one group is partially available and partially unavailable, and the terminal device performs auxiliary time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group, and does not base on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group. At least one TRS of the PF performs auxiliary time-frequency synchronization.
  • the indication information of the PEI may instruct the terminal device to: monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and perform auxiliary time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group, and not monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group. At least one PO of different PFs in the group performs assisted time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group.
  • the acquisition status of at least one TRS of different PFs in the group is available, and the terminal device monitors at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicates that at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is available and does not monitor the difference in at least one group.
  • At least one PO of a PF and at least one TRS indicating a different PF within at least one group are available.
  • the indication information of the PEI may instruct the terminal device to: monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and perform auxiliary time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group, and not monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group.
  • At least one PO of different PFs in the group does not perform auxiliary time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group, that is, the monitoring status of multiple POs of different PFs in at least one group is partial monitoring and part does not need to be monitored, at least The acquisition status of multiple TRSs of different PFs in a group is partially available and partially unavailable, the terminal device monitors at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicates that at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is available and not Listening to at least one PO of a different PF within at least one group and indicating that at least one TRS of a different PF within at least one group is not available.
  • the indication information of the PEI may instruct the terminal device to: monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and not perform auxiliary time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group, and not monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group.
  • At least one PO of different PFs in one group performs auxiliary time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group, that is, the monitoring status of multiple POs of different PFs in at least one group is partial monitoring and part does not need to be monitored, at least The acquisition status of multiple TRSs of different PFs in a group is partially available and partially unavailable, the terminal device monitors at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicates that at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is unavailable and unavailable At least one TRS listening to at least one PO of a different PF within the at least one group and indicating the different PF within the at least one group is available.
  • the indication information of the PEI may instruct the terminal device to: monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and not perform auxiliary time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group, and not monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group.
  • At least one PO of different PFs in a group does not perform auxiliary time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group, that is, the monitoring status of multiple POs of different PFs in at least one group is partial monitoring and part does not need to be monitored,
  • the acquisition status of at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is unavailable
  • the terminal device monitors at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicates that at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is not available and does not listen to at least one group
  • the indication information of the PEI may instruct the terminal device: not to monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and perform auxiliary time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group, and not to monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group.
  • At least one PO of different PFs in a group does not perform auxiliary time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group, that is, the monitoring status of at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group is no need to monitor, and at least one PO in a group
  • the acquisition status of multiple TRSs of different PFs is partially available and partially unavailable
  • the terminal device does not monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicates that at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is available and does not monitor at least At least one PO of a different PF within a group and indicating that at least one TRS of a different PF within a group is not available.
  • the indication information of the PEI can skip to indicate: at least one PO of different PFs in one or more groups is monitoring, no need to monitor or partly monitored and partly not required to be monitored, and/or TRS is available and TRS is not available Or part of the TRS is available and part of it is unavailable, and the indication information may overwrite and indicate the PO monitoring state and/or the obtaining state of the TRS in one or more PFs.
  • the PEI can be located before each PO in the first PF in the same group, providing the realization of PEI hopping to indicate at least one PO of different PFs, saving the number of identifiers carrying PEI (such as DCI bit or reference signal sequence), It is guaranteed that the terminal equipment can stay in sleep state for a longer time and/or can perform PO demodulation for a shorter time under low paging rate, so as to reduce power consumption.
  • PEI such as DCI bit or reference signal sequence
  • step S20 includes:
  • the step S21 includes at least one of the following:
  • the PF in the configured DRX cycle is configured as a single group, analyze the indication information in the PEI before each PO in the first PF of the single group, and determine the monitoring status and/or TRS of the PO corresponding to each PF in the single group
  • the monitoring status includes monitoring, no need to monitor, or partly monitored and partly not needed, and the obtained status can be available, all unavailable, or partially available and partially unavailable.
  • the PF in the configured DRX cycle is configured as multiple groups, analyze the indication information in the PEI before each PO in the first PF of each group, and determine the listening status of the PO corresponding to each PF in each group and/or TRS acquisition status.
  • the step S21 includes at least one of the following:
  • the PF in the configured DRX cycle is configured as a single group, then analyze the indication information in the PEI before each PO in the first PF of the single group, and determine the POs corresponding to the non-contiguous multiple PFs selected by the predetermined rule of the single group The monitoring state of and/or the obtaining state of TRS;
  • the PFs in the configured DRX cycle are configured as multiple groups, analyze the indication information in the PEI before each PO in the first PF of each group, and determine the non-consecutive multiple PFs selected by the predetermined rules of each group respectively The monitoring status of the PO and/or the acquisition status of the TRS corresponding to the location.
  • the predetermined rule can be to determine the number of non-consecutive PFs by selecting the odd and even number of the PF sequence number in the group, the selection of the arithmetic sequence, etc., different from each continuous PF in the group, and the predetermined rule selects a plurality of non-consecutive PFs.
  • PF is applicable to single group and multiple group situations.
  • the default rule is the odd-even number selection method, that is, select the PF with an odd or even number in a group, analyze the PEI before each PO before the first PF in this group, and determine the sequence number The monitoring status of the PO and/or the acquisition status of the TRS corresponding to the odd or even non-consecutive multiple PFs.
  • the default rule is to select multiple non-consecutive PFs with odd serial numbers.
  • a group includes 6 PFs, and each PF has 2 POs.
  • the PFs in the group are PF0, PF1, PF2, PF3, PF4, PF5, the PEI jump before PO0 and PO1 in PF0 at the head of this packet indicates the monitoring status of PO and TRS acquisition status of corresponding positions in PF1, PF3 and PF5. It should be noted that in this optional embodiment, it is only a detailed explanation of the selection of non-consecutive multiple PFs by the preset rules, which may include but not limited to 6 PFs, and also include but not limited to 2 POs per PF .
  • the preset rule can be a plurality of non-contiguous PFs with an even number selected.
  • a group includes 12 PFs, and the PEI jump of the first PF in the group indicates that PF2, PF4, PF6, PF8, PF10 and PF12 correspond to Listening status of the PO and/or acquisition status of the TRS of the location.
  • the preset rule can select the serial number as an arithmetic sequence, and each value of each item is non-continuously multiple PFs.
  • a group includes 12 PFs, and the arithmetic sequence is a sequence whose first item is 0 and the tolerance is 3, and the arithmetic sequence are 0, 3, 6, 9, and 12, so the PEI jump of the first PF in the packet indicates the monitoring status of the PO and/or the acquisition status of the TRS at the corresponding positions of PF3, PF6, PF9 and PF12.
  • the receiving the PEI includes: receiving the PEI of the corresponding PO in at least one group of PFs in at least one DRX cycle.
  • the process of terminal equipment receiving PEI is as follows:
  • the PEI is located before the corresponding PO in the first PF in the same packet.
  • the step S30 includes at least one of the following:
  • the identification unit monitors the PO;
  • the identification unit monitors the PO and performs TRS synchronization;
  • the identification unit does not monitor the PO;
  • the identification unit In response to the indication information in the PEI, the identification unit does not perform TRS synchronization;
  • the identification unit In response to the indication information in the PEI, the identification unit does not monitor the PO and does not perform TRS synchronization.
  • multiple bits in the PEI correspond to jumps to indicate the monitoring status of multiple PFs at the same position PO, that is, if the identification unit (such as a bit) of the indication information is the first value (such as 1), Then the monitoring state of the PO indicated by the identification unit is monitoring, monitoring the PDCCH and/or PDSCH of the PO indicated by the identification unit; if the identification unit (such as a bit) of the indication information is the second value (such as 0), then the The monitoring state of the PO indicated by the identification unit is not monitored, and the PDCCH and/or PDSCH of the PO indicated by the identification unit is not monitored.
  • the identification unit such as a bit
  • the PEI is 0101, that is, the identification unit of the indication information is 0101 in sequence, and PO1 at the same position in PF0, PF1, PF2, and PF3 is skipped sequentially, then the PDCCH and/or PDSCH of PO1 of PF0 will not be monitored, and the PO1 of PF1 will be monitored.
  • the PDCCH and/or PDSCH does not monitor the PDCCH and/or PDSCH of PO1 of PF2, and monitors the PDCCH and/or PDSCH of PO1 of PF3.
  • the identification unit (such as a subsequence) of the reference signal sequence is the first value, and then the PDCCH and/or PDSCH of the PO indicated by the identification unit is monitored, which is the second value , then the PDCCH and/or PDSCH of the PO indicated by this identification unit is not monitored.
  • the multiple bits of the indication information correspond to jumps to indicate the acquisition status of the TRS corresponding to the same position PO of multiple PFs, that is, if the identification unit of the indication information (such as a bit) is the first value (such as 1), then the acquisition status of the TRS corresponding to the PO indicated by the identification unit is available, and it is determined that the TRS corresponding to the PO indicated by the identification unit is applied to the auxiliary time before PO demodulation Frequency synchronization; and/or, if the identification unit (such as a bit) of the indication information is a second value (such as 0), the acquisition status of the TRS corresponding to the PO indicated by the identification unit is unavailable, and it is determined that the identification unit indicated The TRS corresponding to the PO should not be used for auxiliary time-frequency synchronization before PO demodulation.
  • the TRS corresponding to PO1 of PF0 is not available, and the TRS corresponding to PO1 of PF1 is available , The TRS corresponding to PO1 of PF2 is unavailable, and the TRS corresponding to PO1 of PF3 is available.
  • the TRS-related indication information of the PEI is a reference signal sequence
  • the identification unit (such as a subsequence) of the reference signal sequence is the first value
  • the TRS corresponding to the PO indicated by the identification unit is available and applicable to the PO Time-frequency synchronization before demodulation; and/or, if the identification unit (such as subsequence) of the reference signal sequence is the second value, then the TRS corresponding to the PO indicated by the identification unit is not available.
  • the PEI indication information is explained as follows (taking DCI-based PEI as an example, Sequence-based PEI has the same analysis):
  • the PEI is 01010001, that is, the identification unit of the PO monitoring status indication information (that is, the PO indication) is 0101 in turn, the identification unit of the TRS acquisition status indication information (that is, the TRS availability indication) is 0001, and the PEI jumps in turn to indicate PF0, PF1, PO1 at the same position in PF2 and PF3 does not monitor PO1 of PF0 and the TRS corresponding to PO1 of PF0 is not available, monitors PO1 of PF1 and the corresponding TRS of PO1 of PF1 is not available, does not monitor PO1 of PF2 and the corresponding TRS of PO1 of PF2 is not available 1. Monitoring PO1 of PF3 and the TRS corresponding to PO1 of PF3 is available and can be applied to auxiliary time-frequency synchronization before PO demodulation.
  • the PEI carrying the TRS acquisition indication indicates the acquisition status of the TRS in the entire DRX cycle.
  • each PF in the DRX cycle contains at least one PO
  • the number of PFs in the DRX cycle is relatively large, for example, there are 128 PFs in each DRX cycle, etc.
  • the PEI in this application can be used to indicate only the monitoring status of the PO, or only the acquisition status of the TRS corresponding to the PO, or both the monitoring status of the PO and the acquisition of the TRS corresponding to the PO state.
  • a technical solution is given for PEI to simultaneously indicate PO monitoring status and TRS acquisition status, and the example takes DCI-based as an example, and the design of Sequence-based PEI has the same technical solution.
  • PEI only indicates the PO monitoring status or PEI only indicates the TRS acquisition status of the PO; in fact, PEI can also be used to Simultaneously indicate the PO monitoring status and the TRS acquisition status, as shown in the examples in Figure 14 to Figure 16.
  • the purpose of the TRS availability indication is to enable the terminal equipment to know whether the TRS exists in advance, and to assist the SSB to achieve better downlink synchronization when PO demodulation is required, thereby ensuring the success rate of PO demodulation.
  • this patent also proposes to determine whether the TRS availability indication needs to be indicated according to whether the PO in the PEI needs to monitor. That is, if the bit indicating the PO monitoring status in the PEI is 0, that is, there is no need to monitor the PO, the TRS acquisition indication does not need to occupy a bit, and a reserved bit can be preset instead, which can further save the PEI indication bit.
  • the design scheme is also applicable to SSS-based or TRS-based PEI.
  • the bit indicated by PO in the PEI indication: 0 indicates that this PO does not need to be monitored, and 1 indicates that this PO needs to be monitored;
  • TRS availability indication in PEI: 0 bit indicates that TRS is not available, 1 indicates that TRS is available, reserved bit( Reserved bit) indicates that the bit does not need to be occupied temporarily.
  • the TRS availability indication given in the PEI is valid only when the PO needs to be monitored, and the bit design in Figure 11b is that one PO indication corresponds to one TRS acquisition indication, but only when the PO indication bit is When 1, the TRS availability indication needs to analyze the availability and unavailability.
  • the present application also provides a processing method, which is applied to a terminal device.
  • a processing method which is applied to a terminal device.
  • FIG. 12 it includes the following steps:
  • S200 Determine whether to monitor paging messages according to the monitoring status, and/or determine whether to perform time-frequency synchronization through the TRS according to the TRS acquisition status.
  • the terminal device can know the monitoring status of the current and subsequent POs in at least one PF in advance according to the indication information, and continue to sleep at the subsequent paging occasions that do not need to be monitored.
  • the monitored paging occasion wakes up.
  • the terminal device is woken up in a targeted manner, which avoids frequent wakeup and search space detection at each paging occasion, thereby reducing power consumption of the terminal.
  • the terminal device can know in advance the acquisition status of the TRS corresponding to the PO in the current and subsequent at least one PF according to the indication information, and when the subsequent TRS is available and PO monitoring is required, through TRS assists SSB to achieve time-frequency synchronization, shortens the wake-up time of terminal equipment, and reduces the power consumption of terminal equipment.
  • the terminal device may only need to parse one SSB for assisted time-frequency synchronization through TRS, and it may need to parse three SSBs if there is no TRS for assisted time-frequency synchronization.
  • the terminal device performs auxiliary time-frequency synchronization through TRS, which can shorten the PO demodulation time, thereby reducing the wake-up time of the terminal device and reducing the functions of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device after receiving the PEI, can know in advance the monitoring status of the current and subsequent POs in at least one PF according to the indication information, and the terminal device can continue to sleep at subsequent paging occasions that do not need to be monitored. Wake up at the subsequent paging occasions that need to be monitored, so as to avoid frequent wakeup and search space detection in each PO, and reduce the power consumption of terminal equipment by reducing the number of wakeups.
  • the indication information can also indicate in advance whether the TRS of the PO in at least one PF is available, especially for indicating in advance whether the TRS of the paging occasion that needs to be monitored in at least one PF is available, PO monitoring is required and the TRS acquisition status is available.
  • the obtained paging opportunity is directly time-frequency synchronized through the TRS, shortening the wake-up time of the terminal device, and reducing the power consumption of the terminal device by reducing the wake-up time.
  • the PEI is received, and the monitoring status of at least one PO of at least one PF and/or the TRS acquisition status of at least one PF are determined through the indication information in the PEI, and then whether to monitor the paging message is determined according to the monitoring status, and/or , according to the acquisition state of the TRS, it is determined whether to perform time-frequency synchronization through the TRS, and during the paging process, by reducing the number of times the terminal device wakes up and/or reducing the time for the terminal device to wake up, the power consumption of the terminal device is reduced, and the power consumption of the terminal device is realized. purpose of electricity.
  • This application supports the realization of TRS/CSI-RS availability indication through PEI (that is, TRS related indication information in PEI), and supports one PEI to support at least one TRS/CSI-RS acquisition indication corresponding to PO.
  • TRS/CSI-RS availability indication through PEI (that is, TRS related indication information in PEI)
  • TRS related indication information in PEI TRS related indication information in PEI
  • a PEI indicates the acquisition status of the TRS/CSI-RS corresponding to at least one PF, which is better than placing a PEI before each PO of each PF Indicating the acquisition status of TRS/CSI-RS saves signal resources; at the same time, TRS/CSI-RS can also be used to assist downlink synchronization and shorten the PO demodulation time.
  • the manner in which the PEI jump indicates the obtaining state of the TRS is basically the same as that of the PEI jump indicating the listening state of the PO.
  • the indication information of a PEI can indicate at least one continuous PO in the PF, but this way of continuously indicating at least one PO occupies the available resources of the PEI, such as the PEI is a DCI-based PEI (Paging indication is carried by means of DCI bit mapping), and PEI continuously indicates at least one PO to waste DCI bit resources.
  • a PF has 12 POs and continuously indicates 12 PFs, it needs 144bit, resulting in a waste of bits; if the PEI is SSS-based PEI (carrying PEI through SSS (Secondary Synchronization Signa1, secondary synchronization signal) reference signal mapping) or TRS-based PEI, based on SSS sequence or TRS sequence, you need 144 sequences are used to realize the indication of continuous POs, resulting in a waste of sequences.
  • SSS-based PEI carrier PEI through SSS (Secondary Synchronization Signa1, secondary synchronization signal) reference signal mapping
  • TRS-based PEI based on SSS sequence or TRS sequence
  • the present application further proposes another embodiment, where the instruction information jump of a PEI indicates the listening status of one or at least one PO and/or the TRS acquisition status of each PF preset mapping position in at least one PF, preset
  • the mapping position may be the same position in each PF (that is, the ordering position of the PO in the PF is the same), that is, the indication information is used to indicate the monitoring status of at least one PO in the same position of the PF.
  • it may be is at least one of the following:
  • the indication information of the first PEI of the first PF jump indication the first PO of the first PF, the first PO of the second PF, and the first PO of the third PF;
  • the indication information of the second PEI of the first PF jump indication the second PO of the first PF, the second PO of the second PF, and the second PO of the third PF;
  • the indication information of the third PEI of the first PF jumps to indicate: the third PO of the first PF, the third PO of the second PF, and the third PO of the third PF.
  • the preset mapping position may also be a different position in each PF, as long as the PEI completes jump instructions for all POs in at least one PF.
  • the indication information of PEI jumps to indicate the PO at the position where the sorting position in at least one PF increases one by one until it traverses all the POs in the indicated PF, that is, the indication information is used to indicate the listening status of POs in different positions of at least one PF, in a possible
  • it may be at least one of the following:
  • the indication information of the first PEI of the first PF jumps indication: the first PO of the first PF, the second PO of the second PF, and the third PO of the third PF;
  • the indication information of the second PEI of the first PF jumps indication: the second PO of the first PF, the third PO of the second PF, and the first PO of the third PF;
  • the indication information of the third PEI of the first PF jumps and indicates: the third PO of the first PF, the first PO of the second PF, and the second PO of the third PF.
  • non-same positions which may include but not limited to three PFs, and also includes but not limited to three POs for each PF.
  • the indication information of one PEI skips to indicate at least one PO at a preset mapping position of each PF in at least one PF, which saves available signal resources of the PEI.
  • PEI takes DCI-based PEI as an example. There are 2 PFs, and each PF has 4 POs. If one PEI continuously indicates 2 PFs, 8 DCI bits are required. But through a PEI jump to indicate the first PO of 2 PFs, the 2 PFs only need 2 DCI bits.
  • PEI uses SSS-based PEI or TRS-based PEI to perform multiple PF jumps to indicate POs, and the same Ability to save sequence resources.
  • the PO indicating the preset mapping position of each PF in at least one PF can be skipped through the indication information of a PEI, which can save the DCI bit or reference signal sequence, that is, the PEI jumps to indicate the PO, which can save signal resources for indication.
  • the PEI jump indicates the listening status of at least one PO and the acquisition status of the TRS at each PF preset mapping position in at least one PF, that is, as shown in the combination of Figure 5 and Figure 9, the PEI indicates both the listening status of the PO and the TRS acquisition status. The acquisition status of the TRS.
  • the monitoring status may include at least one of the following: monitoring, no need to monitor, or partial monitoring and part no need to monitor, and/or, the acquisition status may include at least one of the following: available, unavailable or partially available Available and partially unobtainable.
  • the indication information of PEI before PO0 of PF0 jumps to indicate PO0 from PF0 to PF3, the indication information of PEI before PO1 of PF0 jumps to indicate PO1 from PF0 to PF3, and the indication information of PEI before PO2 of PF0 jumps to indicate PO2 from PF0 to PF3, and the indication information of PF0
  • the indication information of PEI before PO3 jumps to indicate PO3 of PF0 to PF3, PF0 to PF3 are in the same DRX cycle, and PF0 to PF3 are also in the same group.
  • the PFs of multiple DRX cycles belong to one or more groups, and the skip indication logic of the indication information of the PEI is basically the same, which will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal device In a scenario where the paging rate is very low, the terminal device only knows at least one PO of a part of PFs in a DRX cycle. monitoring status and/or whether to perform time-frequency synchronization through TRS. Unnecessary wake-up times and/or unnecessary wake-up time can only be avoided for at least one PO of a small part of PFs in one DRX cycle, and the purpose of better power consumption reduction cannot be achieved.
  • the method of determining or generating the group information includes at least one of the following:
  • the first number and/or the second number generate the PF of at least one group in at least one DRX cycle.
  • the terminal device Before receiving the PEI, the terminal device can first determine the packet status of the PF.
  • a PEI can indicate the monitoring status of at least one PO of multiple PFs in a group and/or the acquisition status of TRS, such as a PEI indicating the preset mapping positions of multiple PFs in a group, which can be within a DRX cycle PFs form one group, or PFs in one DRX cycle form multiple groups, or PFs in multiple DRX cycles form one group.
  • each PEI Since the indication information of a PEI jumps to indicate the discontinuous POs of multiple PFs in a group, each PEI is only used to indicate the monitoring status and/or TRS acquisition status of a PO of each PF in a group, so each PEI It can indicate the PF of the entire or most of the DRX cycle, so that in the scenario where the terminal device is in a low paging rate, it only needs to analyze the Ns POs in the first PF in the group (each PF corresponds to Ns POs), It is possible to know the listening status of Ns POs in the PF in one DRX cycle or multiple DRX cycles and/or the acquisition status of TRS, so as to prevent the terminal device from being woken up at the paging opportunity that does not need to be monitored, so that the terminal device can be used for a longer period of time.
  • the time is in a dormant state, thereby reducing power consumption; and/or the terminal device obtains the TRS corresponding to the PO according to the PEI, and uses the TRS for auxiliary time-frequency synchronization to shorten the wake-up time, thereby saving power consumption.
  • the indication information of the PEI may indicate the TRS of each PF in group 1 and group 2 .
  • the design diagram of the embodiment is only used to represent the scheduling process, and does not indicate that the scheduled PFs are scheduled in parallel, that is, PF0, PF1, ..., PF63 are arranged in chronological order.
  • the grouping method and the indication method of PEI hopping indicating TRS in Fig. 10 are also applicable to Fig. 7, Fig. 8a and Fig. 8b. In Fig. 7, Fig. 8a and Fig. 8b, the PEI can simultaneously indicate the acquisition status of the TRS corresponding to the PO.
  • PEI jumps can be added in Figure 10 to indicate the monitoring status of at least one PO of each group of PFs.
  • PEI jumps indicate that each PF in each group corresponds to The monitoring status of the PO and the acquisition status of the TRS of the location.
  • the first number is the number of PFs included in the DRX cycle
  • the second number is the number of identifiers that carry the indication information of the PEI. According to the first number and/or the second number, determine which paging frames in the DRX cycle the PF of at least one group in at least one DRX cycle is, for example, determine the number L of PFs in a group according to the first number and the second number.
  • the first number is N
  • the second number is G
  • the total number of radio frames in one DRX cycle is T.
  • N the number of PFs in a group
  • N>L a classification indication can be made for each L PF to form a group.
  • the design diagram of the embodiment is only used to represent the scheduling process, and does not indicate that the scheduled PFs are scheduled in parallel, that is, PF0, PF1, ..., PF63 are arranged in chronological order.
  • the meeting the preset conditions includes at least one of the following:
  • At least one PF indicated by the indication information exists in the at least one group
  • the PEI is located before the corresponding PO in the first PF in the same group, and at least one PF indicated by the indication information exists in the at least one group.
  • the terminal device only wakes up and monitors the paging occasions that need to be monitored, and/or performs auxiliary time-frequency synchronization through the TRS when PO monitoring is required and the TRS is available.
  • a DRX cycle contains multiple groups, place a PEI before the Ns PO monitoring of the first PF of each group, and the indication information of this PEI indicates the corresponding position of each PF of each group Whether the PO needs to be monitored and/or whether the corresponding TRS is available.
  • the terminal device only wakes up and monitors the paging occasions that need to be monitored, and/or performs time-frequency synchronization through the TRS when PO monitoring is required and the TRS is available.
  • the processing method further includes: receiving a PEI, specifically: receiving a PEI of a corresponding PO in at least one group of PFs in at least one DRX cycle.
  • the process of terminal equipment receiving PEI is as follows:
  • the PEI is located before the corresponding PO in the first PF in the same packet.
  • the step S200 includes at least one of the following:
  • At least one TRS indicating a different PF within at least one group is available
  • Listening to at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicating at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is available and not listening to at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicating at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group available;
  • Listening to at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicating at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is available and not listening to at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicating at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group not available;
  • Not listening to at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicating at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is available and not listening to at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicating at least one of different PFs in at least one group TRS is not available.
  • step S200 is further detailed description:
  • the indication information of the PEI may indicate that the terminal device performs assisted time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group, that is, the acquisition status of at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is available,
  • the terminal device can perform auxiliary time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group according to the obtained state, so as to reduce the time-consuming time of time-frequency synchronization and reduce the power consumption of the terminal device.
  • the indication information of the PEI may instruct the terminal device to monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group, that is, the monitoring state of at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group is monitoring, and the terminal device can monitor according to the monitoring status , monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group, and do not monitor POs whose monitoring status is no need to monitor, reduce the number of wake-ups of the terminal device, and reduce the power consumption of the terminal device.
  • the indication information of the PEI may instruct the terminal device to monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and perform assisted time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group, that is, different PFs in at least one group
  • the listening state of at least one PO of the PF is monitoring and the obtaining state of at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is available.
  • the terminal device can monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group according to the monitoring status, reduce the number of wake-ups of the terminal device, and the terminal device can perform auxiliary time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group according to the obtained status, Reduce the time-consuming time-frequency synchronization and reduce the power consumption of terminal equipment.
  • the indication information of the PEI may indicate that the terminal device does not perform assisted time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group, that is, the acquisition status of at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is unavailable , the terminal device does not perform auxiliary time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group.
  • the indication information of the PEI may indicate that the terminal device does not monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group, that is, the monitoring status of at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group is no need to monitor, and the terminal device does not monitor At least one PO of a different PF within at least one group.
  • the indication information of the PEI may indicate that the terminal device does not monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and does not perform auxiliary time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group, that is, at least one group
  • the monitoring status of at least one PO of different PFs in the group is no need to monitor and the acquisition status of at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is not available, the terminal device does not monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and is not based on at least one At least one TRS of different PFs in the group performs auxiliary time-frequency synchronization.
  • the PEI indication information may instruct the terminal device to monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and not to monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group, that is, multiple POs of different PFs in at least one group
  • the monitoring state of the PO is partially monitored and partially not required, and the terminal device monitors at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and does not monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group.
  • the indication information of the PEI may instruct the terminal device to perform assisted time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group and not to perform assisted time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group, That is, the acquisition status of multiple TRSs of different PFs in at least one group is partially available and partially unavailable, and the terminal device performs auxiliary time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group, and does not base on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group. At least one TRS of the PF performs auxiliary time-frequency synchronization.
  • the indication information of the PEI may instruct the terminal device to: monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and perform auxiliary time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group, and not monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group. At least one PO of different PFs in the group performs assisted time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group.
  • the acquisition status of at least one TRS of different PFs in the group is available, and the terminal device monitors at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicates that at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is available and does not monitor the difference in at least one group.
  • At least one PO of a PF and at least one TRS indicating a different PF within at least one group are available.
  • the indication information of the PEI may instruct the terminal device to: monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and perform auxiliary time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group, and not monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group.
  • At least one PO of different PFs in the group does not perform auxiliary time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group, that is, the monitoring status of multiple POs of different PFs in at least one group is partial monitoring and part does not need to be monitored, at least The acquisition status of multiple TRSs of different PFs in a group is partially available and partially unavailable, the terminal device monitors at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicates that at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is available and not Listening to at least one PO of a different PF within at least one group and indicating that at least one TRS of a different PF within at least one group is not available.
  • the indication information of the PEI may instruct the terminal device to: monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and not perform auxiliary time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group, and not monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group.
  • At least one PO of different PFs in one group performs auxiliary time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group, that is, the monitoring status of multiple POs of different PFs in at least one group is partial monitoring and part does not need to be monitored, at least The acquisition status of multiple TRSs of different PFs in a group is partially available and partially unavailable, the terminal device monitors at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicates that at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is unavailable and unavailable At least one TRS listening to at least one PO of a different PF within the at least one group and indicating the different PF within the at least one group is available.
  • the indication information of the PEI may instruct the terminal device to: monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and not perform auxiliary time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group, and not monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group.
  • At least one PO of different PFs in a group does not perform auxiliary time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group, that is, the monitoring status of multiple POs of different PFs in at least one group is partial monitoring and part does not need to be monitored,
  • the acquisition status of at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is unavailable
  • the terminal device monitors at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicates that at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is not available and does not listen to at least one group
  • the indication information of the PEI may instruct the terminal device: not to monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and perform auxiliary time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group, and not to monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group.
  • At least one PO of different PFs in a group does not perform auxiliary time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group, that is, the monitoring status of at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group is no need to monitor, and at least one PO in a group
  • the acquisition status of multiple TRSs of different PFs is partially available and partially unavailable
  • the terminal device does not monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicates that at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is available and does not monitor at least At least one PO of a different PF within a group and indicating that at least one TRS of a different PF within a group is not available.
  • the indication information of the PEI can skip to indicate: at least one PO of different PFs in one or more groups is monitoring, no need to monitor or partly monitored and partly not required to be monitored, and/or TRS is available and TRS is not available Or part of the TRS is available and part of it is unavailable, and the indication information may overwrite and indicate the PO monitoring state and/or the obtaining state of the TRS in one or more PFs.
  • the PEI can be located before each PO in the first PF in the same group, providing the realization of PEI hopping to indicate at least one PO of different PFs, saving the number of identifiers carrying PEI (such as DCI bit or reference signal sequence), It is guaranteed that the terminal equipment can stay in sleep state for a longer time and/or can perform PO demodulation for a shorter time under low paging rate, so as to reduce power consumption.
  • PEI such as DCI bit or reference signal sequence
  • step S100 includes:
  • the indication information determine the listening state of at least one PO of at least one PF of at least one group and/or the obtaining state of TRS in the same or different DRX cycles.
  • the step S102 includes at least one of the following:
  • the monitoring status may include at least one of the following: monitoring, no need to monitor, or partial monitoring and part of no need to monitor, and/or, the acquisition status may include at least one of the following: available, neither available Or partially available and partially unavailable.
  • the PF in the configured DRX cycle is configured as multiple groups, analyze the indication information in the PEI before each PO in the first PF of each group, and determine the listening status of the PO corresponding to each PF in each group and/or TRS acquisition status.
  • the step S102 includes at least one of the following:
  • the PF in the configured DRX cycle is configured as a single group, then analyze the indication information in the PEI before each PO in the first PF of the single group, and determine the POs corresponding to the non-contiguous multiple PFs selected by the predetermined rule of the single group The monitoring state of and/or the obtaining state of TRS;
  • the PFs in the configured DRX cycle are configured as multiple groups, analyze the indication information in the PEI before each PO in the first PF of each group, and determine the non-consecutive multiple PFs selected by the predetermined rules of each group respectively The monitoring status of the PO and/or the acquisition status of the TRS corresponding to the location.
  • the predetermined rule can be to determine the number of non-consecutive PFs by selecting the odd and even number of the PF sequence number in the group, the selection of the arithmetic sequence, etc., different from each continuous PF in the group, and the predetermined rule selects a plurality of non-consecutive PFs.
  • PF is applicable to single group and multiple group situations.
  • the default rule is the odd-even number selection method, that is, select the PF with an odd or even number in a group, analyze the PEI before each PO before the first PF in this group, and determine the sequence number The monitoring status of the PO and/or the acquisition status of the TRS corresponding to the odd or even non-consecutive multiple PFs.
  • the default rule is to select multiple non-consecutive PFs with odd serial numbers.
  • a group includes 6 PFs, and each PF has 2 POs.
  • the PFs in the group are PF0, PF1, PF2, PF3, PF4, PF5, the PEI jump before PO0 and PO1 in PF0 at the head of this packet indicates the monitoring status of PO and TRS acquisition status of corresponding positions in PF1, PF3 and PF5. It should be noted that in this optional embodiment, it is only a detailed explanation of the selection of non-consecutive multiple PFs by the preset rules, which may include but not limited to 6 PFs, and also include but not limited to 2 POs per PF .
  • the preset rule can be a plurality of non-contiguous PFs with an even number selected.
  • a group includes 12 PFs, and the PEI jump of the first PF in the group indicates that PF2, PF4, PF6, PF8, PF10 and PF12 correspond to Listening status of the PO and/or acquisition status of the TRS of the location.
  • the preset rule can select the serial number as an arithmetic sequence, and each value of each item is non-continuously multiple PFs.
  • a group includes 12 PFs, and the arithmetic sequence is a sequence whose first item is 0 and the tolerance is 3, and the arithmetic sequence are 0, 3, 6, 9, and 12, so the PEI jump of the first PF in the packet indicates the monitoring status of the PO and/or the acquisition status of the TRS at the corresponding positions of PF3, PF6, PF9 and PF12.
  • the step S200 includes at least one of the following:
  • the identification unit monitors the PO;
  • the identification unit monitors the PO and performs TRS synchronization;
  • the identification unit does not monitor the PO;
  • the identification unit In response to the indication information, the identification unit does not perform TRS synchronization;
  • the identification unit In response to the indication information, the identification unit does not monitor the PO and does not perform TRS synchronization.
  • multiple bits in the PEI correspond to jumps to indicate the monitoring status of multiple PFs at the same position PO, that is, if the identification unit (such as a bit) of the indication information is the first value (such as 1), Then the monitoring state of the PO indicated by the identification unit is monitoring, monitoring the PDCCH and/or PDSCH of the PO indicated by the identification unit; and/or, if the identification unit (such as a bit) of the indication information is a second value (such as 0 ), the monitoring state of the PO indicated by the identification unit is not monitored, and the PDCCH and/or PDSCH of the PO indicated by the identification unit is not monitored.
  • the identification unit such as a bit
  • the PDCCH and/or PDSCH of PO1 of PF0 will not be monitored, and the PO1 of PF1 will be monitored.
  • the PDCCH and/or PDSCH does not monitor the PDCCH and/or PDSCH of PO1 of PF2, and monitors the PDCCH and/or PDSCH of PO1 of PF3.
  • the identification unit (such as a subsequence) of the reference signal sequence is the first value
  • the multiple bits of the indication information correspond to jumps to indicate the acquisition status of the TRS corresponding to the same position PO of multiple PFs, that is, if the identification unit of the indication information (such as a bit) is the first value (such as 1), then the acquisition status of the TRS corresponding to the PO indicated by the identification unit is available, and it is determined that the TRS corresponding to the PO indicated by the identification unit is applied to the auxiliary time before PO demodulation Frequency synchronization; and/or, if the identification unit (such as a bit) of the indication information is a second value (such as 0), the acquisition status of the TRS corresponding to the PO indicated by the identification unit is unavailable, and it is determined that the identification unit indicated The TRS corresponding to the PO should not be used for auxiliary time-frequency synchronization before PO demodulation.
  • the TRS corresponding to PO1 of PF0 is not available, and the TRS corresponding to PO1 of PF1 is available , The TRS corresponding to PO1 of PF2 is unavailable, and the TRS corresponding to PO1 of PF3 is available.
  • the TRS-related indication information of the PEI is a reference signal sequence
  • the identification unit (such as a subsequence) of the reference signal sequence is the first value
  • the TRS corresponding to the PO indicated by the identification unit is available and applicable to the PO Time-frequency synchronization before demodulation
  • the identification unit (such as subsequence) of the reference signal sequence is the second value
  • the TRS corresponding to the PO indicated by the identification unit is unavailable.
  • the PEI indication information is explained as follows: (taking DCI-based PEI as an example, Sequence-based PEI has the same analysis)
  • the PEI is 01010001, that is, the identification unit of the PO monitoring status indication information (that is, the PO indication) is 0101 in turn, the identification unit of the TRS acquisition status indication information (that is, the TRS availability indication) is 0001, and the PEI jumps in turn to indicate PF0, PF1, PO1 at the same position in PF2 and PF3 does not monitor PO1 of PF0 and the TRS corresponding to PO1 of PF0 is not available, monitors PO1 of PF1 and the corresponding TRS of PO1 of PF1 is not available, does not monitor PO1 of PF2 and the corresponding TRS of PO1 of PF2 is not available 1. Monitoring PO1 of PF3 and the TRS corresponding to PO1 of PF3 is available and can be applied to auxiliary time-frequency synchronization before PO demodulation.
  • the PEI carrying the TRS acquisition indication indicates the acquisition status of the TRS in the entire DRX cycle.
  • each PF in the DRX cycle contains at least one PO
  • the number of PFs in the DRX cycle is relatively large, for example, there are 128 PFs in each DRX cycle, etc.
  • the PEI in this application can be used to indicate only the monitoring status of the PO, or only the acquisition status of the TRS corresponding to the PO, or both the monitoring status of the PO and the acquisition of the TRS corresponding to the PO state.
  • a technical solution is given for PEI to simultaneously indicate PO monitoring status and TRS acquisition status, and the example takes DCI-based as an example, and the design of Sequence-based PEI has the same technical solution.
  • the above-mentioned embodiments and the examples in Figures 5 to 10 show a schematic diagram of PEI indicating only PO monitoring status or PEI indicating only PO TRS acquisition status.
  • PEI can also be used to Simultaneously indicate the PO monitoring status and the TRS acquisition status, as shown in the examples in Figure 14 to Figure 16.
  • the purpose of the TRS availability indication is to enable the terminal equipment to know whether the TRS exists in advance, and to assist the SSB to achieve better downlink synchronization when PO demodulation is required, thereby ensuring the success rate of PO demodulation.
  • this patent also proposes to determine whether the TRS availability indication needs to be indicated according to whether the PO in the PEI needs to monitor. That is, if the bit indicating the PO monitoring status in the PEI is 0, that is, there is no need to monitor the PO, the TRS acquisition indication does not need to occupy a bit, and a reserved bit can be preset instead, which can further save the PEI indication bit.
  • the design scheme is also applicable to SSS-based or TRS-based PEI.
  • the bit indicated by PO in the PEI indication: 0 indicates that this PO does not need to be monitored, and 1 indicates that this PO needs to be monitored;
  • TRS availability indication in PEI: 0 bit indicates that TRS is not available, 1 indicates that TRS is available, reserved bit( Reserved bit) indicates that the bit does not need to be occupied temporarily.
  • the TRS availability indication given in the PEI is valid only when the PO needs to be monitored, and the bit design in Figure 11b is that one PO indication corresponds to one TRS acquisition indication, but only when the PO indication bit is When 1, the TRS availability indication needs to analyze the availability and unavailability.
  • the present application also provides a processing method, which is applied to a network device. Referring to FIG. 13, the method includes the following steps:
  • A10 Sending the PEI to the terminal device, so that the terminal device determines the listening state of at least one PO of at least one PF and/or the obtaining state of the TRS according to the indication information in the PEI;
  • the monitoring status is used to indicate whether to monitor the paging message, and/or the obtaining status is used to indicate whether the TRS is available.
  • the network device sends a PEI to the terminal device; the PEI is used to determine the listening state of at least one PO of at least one PF and/or the obtaining state of the TRS;
  • the monitoring state is used to indicate whether the terminal device determines whether to monitor the paging message, and/or the obtaining state is used to indicate whether the TRS is available.
  • the network device sends a PEI to the terminal device, where the PEI includes indication information, and the indication information of the PEI is used to determine the monitoring status of at least one PO of at least one PF and/or the acquisition status of the TRS; the The listening state is used to instruct the terminal device to determine whether to monitor the paging message, and/or the obtaining state is used to instruct the terminal device to determine whether the TRS is available.
  • the indication information may be used to indicate the monitoring status of POs in at least one PF at the current time and after the current time, that is, the indication information may indicate in advance whether POs in at least one PF need to be monitored, and the terminal device receives After the PEI, the monitoring status of POs in at least one subsequent PF can be known in advance according to the indication information, and the terminal device can continue to sleep at the paging occasions when the subsequent monitoring status is not monitored, and only wake up at the subsequent paging occasions that need to be monitored. Therefore, the terminal device can be woken up in a targeted manner according to the indication information in the PEI and the monitoring status of the PO, so as to avoid frequent wakeups at each paging occasion for search space detection, thereby realizing power saving of the terminal device.
  • the indication information can also be used to indicate the current time and the acquisition status of the TRS corresponding to the PO in at least one PF after the current time, that is, the indication information can indicate in advance whether the TRS of the PO in at least one PF can be obtained
  • the terminal device knows in advance the acquisition status of the TRS corresponding to the PO in at least one subsequent PF according to the indication information, and can perform auxiliary time-frequency synchronization through the TRS when the subsequent TRS is available and needs to be monitored by the PO. Quickly realize downlink synchronization and complete PO demodulation. In this way, the number of SSBs used by the terminal device for downlink synchronization can be reduced, the synchronization duration of the terminal device can be shortened, and the power consumption of the terminal device can be reduced.
  • the terminal device may only need to parse one SSB, and if there is no TRS for assisted time-frequency synchronization, it may need to parse three SSBs to reduce the number of SSBs used for downlink synchronization, which can be Shorten the downlink synchronization time, thereby reducing the wake-up time of terminal devices.
  • the indication information may indicate the listening status of POs in at least one PF and the corresponding TRS acquisition status at the previous time and after the current time, that is, the indication information may indicate in advance whether POs in at least one PF need to be monitored And whether the corresponding TRS can be obtained, after the terminal device receives the PEI, it can know the monitoring status of the PO in at least one subsequent PF in advance according to the indication information, and the terminal device can continue to sleep at subsequent paging opportunities that do not need to be monitored.
  • the following paging occasions that need to be monitored are awakened, so as to avoid frequent awakening and search space detection at each paging occasion, increase the sleep time of paging occasions, and reduce the power consumption of terminal equipment.
  • the indication information may also indicate in advance whether the TRS corresponding to the PO in at least one PF is available, especially for indicating in advance whether the TRS corresponding to the PO that at least one PF needs to monitor is available.
  • the terminal device can choose to use TRS to perform auxiliary time-frequency synchronization to shorten the time for the terminal device to perform PO demodulation, thereby realizing power saving of the terminal device.
  • This application supports TRS/CSI-RS acquisition indication through PEI (that is, TRS related indication information in PEI), and supports one PEI to support TRS/CSI-RS acquisition indication corresponding to at least one PO.
  • PEI that is, TRS related indication information in PEI
  • TRS/CSI-RS acquisition indication corresponding to at least one PO.
  • a PEI indicates the acquisition status of the TRS/CSI-RS corresponding to at least one PF, which is better than placing a PEI before each PO of each PF Indicating the acquisition status of TRS/CSI-RS saves signal resources; at the same time, TRS/CSI-RS can also be used to assist downlink synchronization and shorten the PO demodulation time.
  • the manner in which the PEI jump indicates the obtaining state of the TRS is basically the same as that of the PEI jump indicating the listening state of the PO.
  • the indication information of a PEI can indicate at least one continuous PO in the PF, but this way of continuously indicating at least one PO occupies the available resources of the PEI, such as the PEI is a DCI-based PEI (Paging indication is carried by means of DCI bit mapping), and PEI continuously indicates at least one PO to waste DCI bit resources.
  • a PF has 12 POs and continuously indicates 12 PFs, it needs 144bit, resulting in a waste of bits; if the PEI is SSS-based PEI (carrying PEI through SSS (Secondary Synchronization Signa1, secondary synchronization signal) reference signal mapping) or TRS-based PEI, based on SSS sequence or TRS sequence, you need 144 sequences are used to realize the indication of continuous POs, resulting in a waste of sequences.
  • SSS-based PEI carrier PEI through SSS (Secondary Synchronization Signa1, secondary synchronization signal) reference signal mapping
  • TRS-based PEI based on SSS sequence or TRS sequence
  • a PEI indication information jump indicates at least one PO monitoring status and/or TRS acquisition status of each PF preset mapping position in at least one PF, and the preset mapping position It may be the same position in each PF (that is, the ordering position of the PO in the PF is the same), that is, the indication information is used to indicate the listening status of at least one PO in the same position of the PF.
  • it may be as follows at least one of:
  • the indication information of the first PEI of the first PF jump indication the first PO of the first PF, the first PO of the second PF, and the first PO of the third PF;
  • the indication information of the second PEI of the first PF jump indication the second PO of the first PF, the second PO of the second PF, and the second PO of the third PF;
  • the indication information of the third PEI of the first PF jumps to indicate: the third PO of the first PF, the third PO of the second PF, and the third PO of the third PF.
  • the preset mapping position may also be a different position in each PF, as long as the PEI completes jump instructions for all POs in at least one PF.
  • the indication information of PEI jumps to indicate the PO at the position where the sorting position in at least one PF increases one by one until it traverses all the POs in the indicated PF, that is, the indication information is used to indicate the listening status of POs in different positions of at least one PF, in a possible
  • it may be at least one of the following:
  • the indication information of the first PEI of the first PF jumps indication: the first PO of the first PF, the second PO of the second PF, and the third PO of the third PF;
  • the indication information of the second PEI of the first PF jumps indication: the second PO of the first PF, the third PO of the second PF, and the first PO of the third PF;
  • the indication information of the third PEI of the first PF jumps and indicates: the third PO of the first PF, the first PO of the second PF, and the second PO of the third PF.
  • non-same positions which may include but not limited to three PFs, and also includes but not limited to three POs per PF.
  • the indication information of one PEI skips to indicate at least one PO of each PF preset mapping position in at least one PF, which saves available resources of the PEI.
  • PEI takes DCI-based PEI as an example. There are 2 PFs, and each PF has 4 POs. If one PEI continuously indicates 2 PFs, 8 DCI bits are required. But through a PEI jump to indicate the first PO of 2 PFs, the 2 PFs only need 2 DCI bits.
  • PEI uses SSS-based PEI or TRS-based PEI to perform multiple PF jumps to indicate POs, and the same Ability to save sequence resources.
  • the PO indicating the preset mapping position of each PF in at least one PF can be skipped through the indication information of a PEI, which can save DCI bit or reference signal sequence, that is, the PEI jump indicates PO, which can save signal resources for indication.
  • the PEI jump indicates the listening status of at least one PO and the TRS acquisition status of each PF preset mapping position in at least one PF.
  • the monitoring status may include at least one of the following: monitoring, no monitoring, or partial monitoring and part no monitoring required
  • the acquisition status may include at least one of the following: available, unavailable, or partially available and partially unavailable get.
  • the indication information of PEI before PO0 of PF0 jumps to indicate PO0 from PF0 to PF3, the indication information of PEI before PO1 of PF0 jumps to indicate PO1 from PF0 to PF3, and the indication information of PEI before PO2 of PF0 jumps to indicate PO2 from PF0 to PF3, and the indication information of PF0
  • the indication information of PEI before PO3 jumps to indicate PO3 of PF0 to PF3, PF0 to PF3 are in the same DRX cycle, and PF0 to PF3 are also in the same group.
  • the PFs of multiple DRX cycles belong to one or more groups, and the skip indication logic of the indication information of the PEI is basically the same, which will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal device In a scenario where the paging rate is very low, the terminal device only knows at least one PO of a part of PFs in a DRX cycle. monitoring status and/or whether to perform time-frequency synchronization through TRS. Unnecessary wake-up times and/or unnecessary wake-up time can only be avoided for at least one PO of a small part of PFs in one DRX cycle, and the purpose of better power consumption reduction cannot be achieved.
  • it also includes before the step A10:
  • A00 Determine the grouping status of at least one DRX cycle.
  • the network device Before the network device sends the PEI to the terminal device, the network device can first configure the group status of the PF.
  • a PEI can indicate the monitoring status of at least one PO and/or the TRS acquisition status of multiple PFs in a group.
  • a PEI indicates a
  • the POs of the preset mapping positions of multiple PFs in a group can be that PFs in one DRX cycle form one group, or that PFs in one DRX cycle form multiple groups, or that PFs in multiple DRX cycles form one grouping.
  • each PEI Since the indication information of a PEI jumps to indicate the discontinuous POs of multiple PFs in a group, each PEI is only used to indicate the monitoring status and/or TRS acquisition status of a PO of each PF in a group, so each PEI It can indicate the PF of the entire or most of the DRX cycle, so that in the scenario where the terminal device is in a low paging rate, it only needs to analyze the Ns POs in the first PF in the group (each PF corresponds to Ns POs), It is possible to know the listening status of Ns POs in the PF in one DRX cycle or multiple DRX cycles and/or the acquisition status of TRS, so as to prevent the terminal device from being woken up at the paging opportunity that does not need to be monitored, so that the terminal device can be used for a longer period of time.
  • the time is in a dormant state, thereby reducing power consumption; and/or the terminal device obtains the TRS corresponding to the PO according to the PEI, and uses the TRS for auxiliary time-frequency synchronization to shorten the wake-up time, thereby saving power consumption.
  • the indication information of the PEI may indicate the TRS of each PF in group 1 and group 2 .
  • the design diagram of the embodiment is only used to represent the scheduling process, and does not indicate that the scheduled PFs are scheduled in parallel, that is, PF0, PF1, ..., PF63 are arranged in chronological order.
  • the grouping method and the indication method of PEI hopping indicating TRS in Fig. 10 are also applicable to Fig. 7, Fig. 8a and Fig. 8b. In Fig. 7, Fig. 8a and Fig. 8b, the PEI can simultaneously indicate the acquisition status of the TRS corresponding to the PO.
  • PEI jumps can be added in Figure 10 to indicate the monitoring status of at least one PO of each group of PFs.
  • PEI jumps indicate that each PF in each group corresponds to The monitoring status of the PO and the acquisition status of the TRS of the location.
  • the PEI is located before the corresponding PO in the first PF in the same group, and at least one PF indicated by the indication information exists in the at least one group.
  • the network device can first configure the grouping status of PF, which can include the following:
  • the terminal device If there is only one packet in a DRX cycle, place a PEI before the Ns POs of the first PF in a DRX cycle, and the indication information of this PEI indicates the corresponding position of each PF in the entire DRX cycle Whether the PO needs to be monitored and/or whether to perform auxiliary time-frequency synchronization through TRS. If there is no need to monitor, the terminal device directly skips the POs that do not need to be monitored, stays dormant, and wakes up only when the paging occasion that needs to be monitored is awakened to perform PDCCH monitoring, and/or when the PO needs to be monitored and the TRS indicated by the PEI is available, Auxiliary time-frequency synchronization via TRS.
  • a DRX cycle contains multiple groups, place a PEI before the Ns PO monitoring of the first PF of each group, and the indication information of this PEI indicates the corresponding position of each PF of each group Whether the PO needs to be monitored and/or whether to perform auxiliary time-frequency synchronization through TRS. If no monitoring is required, the terminal device directly skips the PO that does not need to be monitored, keeps sleeping, and only wakes up at the PO position that needs to be monitored for PDCCH monitoring, and/or Or when the PO needs to monitor and the TRS indicated by the PEI is available, the TRS is used to assist in time-frequency synchronization.
  • step A00 includes:
  • the first number is the number of PFs included in the DRX cycle
  • the second number is the number of identifiers that carry the indication information of the PEI. According to the first number and/or the second number, determine which paging frames in the DRX cycle the PF of at least one group in at least one DRX cycle is, for example, determine the number L of PFs in a group according to the first number and the second number.
  • the first number is N
  • the second number is G
  • the total number of radio frames in one DRX cycle is T.
  • N the number of PFs in a group
  • N>L a classification indication can be made for each L PF to form a group.
  • the design diagram of the embodiment is only used to represent the scheduling process, and does not indicate that the scheduled PFs are scheduled in parallel, that is, PF0, PF1, ..., PF63 are arranged in chronological order.
  • the indication information is used to indicate at least one of the following situations:
  • At least one TRS indicating a different PF within at least one group is available
  • Listening to at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicating at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is available and not listening to at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicating at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group available;
  • Listening to at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicating at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is available and not listening to at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicating at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group not available;
  • Not listening to at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicating at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is available and not listening to at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicating at least one of different PFs in at least one group TRS is not available.
  • the indication information of the PEI may indicate that the terminal device performs assisted time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group, that is, the acquisition status of at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is available,
  • the terminal device can perform auxiliary time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group according to the obtained state, so as to reduce the time-consuming time of time-frequency synchronization and reduce the power consumption of the terminal device.
  • the indication information of the PEI may instruct the terminal device to monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group, that is, the monitoring state of at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group is monitoring, and the terminal device can monitor according to the monitoring status , monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group, and do not monitor POs whose monitoring status is no need to monitor, reduce the number of wake-ups of the terminal device, and reduce the power consumption of the terminal device.
  • the indication information of the PEI may instruct the terminal device to monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and perform assisted time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group, that is, different PFs in at least one group
  • the listening state of at least one PO of the PF is monitoring and the obtaining state of at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is available.
  • the terminal device can monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group according to the monitoring status, reduce the number of wake-ups of the terminal device, and the terminal device can perform auxiliary time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group according to the obtained status, Reduce the time-consuming time-frequency synchronization and reduce the power consumption of terminal equipment.
  • the indication information of the PEI may indicate that the terminal device does not perform assisted time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group, that is, the acquisition status of at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is unavailable , the terminal device does not perform auxiliary time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group.
  • the indication information of the PEI may indicate that the terminal device does not monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group, that is, the monitoring status of at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group is no need to monitor, and the terminal device does not monitor At least one PO of a different PF within at least one group.
  • the indication information of the PEI may indicate that the terminal device does not monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and does not perform auxiliary time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group, that is, at least one group
  • the monitoring status of at least one PO of different PFs in the group is no need to monitor and the acquisition status of at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is not available, the terminal device does not monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and is not based on at least one At least one TRS of different PFs in the group performs auxiliary time-frequency synchronization.
  • the PEI indication information may instruct the terminal device to monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and not to monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group, that is, multiple POs of different PFs in at least one group
  • the monitoring state of the PO is partially monitored and partially not required, and the terminal device monitors at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and does not monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group.
  • the indication information of the PEI may instruct the terminal device to perform assisted time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group and not to perform assisted time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group, That is, the acquisition status of multiple TRSs of different PFs in at least one group is partially available and partially unavailable, and the terminal device performs auxiliary time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group, and does not base on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group. At least one TRS of the PF performs auxiliary time-frequency synchronization.
  • the indication information of the PEI may instruct the terminal device to: monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and perform auxiliary time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group, and not monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group. At least one PO of different PFs in the group performs assisted time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group.
  • the acquisition status of at least one TRS of different PFs in the group is available, and the terminal device monitors at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicates that at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is available and does not monitor the difference in at least one group.
  • At least one PO of a PF and at least one TRS indicating a different PF within at least one group are available.
  • the indication information of the PEI may instruct the terminal device to: monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and perform auxiliary time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group, and not monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group.
  • At least one PO of different PFs in the group and not based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group perform auxiliary time-frequency synchronization, that is, the monitoring status of multiple POs of different PFs in at least one group is partial monitoring and part does not need to be monitored, at least The acquisition status of multiple TRSs of different PFs in a group is partially available and partially unavailable, the terminal device monitors at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicates that at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is available and not Listening to at least one PO of a different PF within at least one group and indicating that at least one TRS of a different PF within at least one group is not available.
  • the indication information of the PEI may instruct the terminal device to: monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and not perform auxiliary time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group, and not monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group.
  • At least one PO of different PFs in one group performs auxiliary time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group, that is, the monitoring status of multiple POs of different PFs in at least one group is partial monitoring and part does not need to be monitored, at least The acquisition status of multiple TRSs of different PFs in a group is partially available and partially unavailable, the terminal device monitors at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicates that at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is unavailable and unavailable At least one TRS listening to at least one PO of a different PF within the at least one group and indicating the different PF within the at least one group is available.
  • the indication information of the PEI may instruct the terminal device to: monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and not perform auxiliary time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group, and not monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group.
  • At least one PO of different PFs in a group does not perform auxiliary time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group, that is, the monitoring status of multiple POs of different PFs in at least one group is partial monitoring and part does not need to be monitored,
  • the acquisition status of at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is unavailable
  • the terminal device monitors at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicates that at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is not available and does not listen to at least one group
  • the indication information of the PEI may instruct the terminal device: not to monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and perform auxiliary time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group, and not to monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group.
  • At least one PO of different PFs in a group does not perform auxiliary time-frequency synchronization based on at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group, that is, the monitoring status of at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group is no need to monitor, and at least one PO in a group
  • the acquisition status of multiple TRSs of different PFs is partially available and partially unavailable
  • the terminal device does not monitor at least one PO of different PFs in at least one group and indicates that at least one TRS of different PFs in at least one group is available and does not monitor at least At least one PO of a different PF within a group and indicating that at least one TRS of a different PF within a group is not available.
  • the indication information of the PEI can skip to indicate: at least one PO of different PFs in one or more groups is monitoring, no need to monitor or partly monitored and partly not required to be monitored, and/or TRS is available and TRS is not available Or part of the TRS is available and part of it is unavailable, and the indication information may overwrite and indicate the PO monitoring state and/or the obtaining state of the TRS in one or more PFs.
  • the PEI can be located before each PO in the first PF in the same group, providing the realization of PEI hopping to indicate at least one PO of different PFs, saving the number of identifiers carrying PEI (such as DCI bit or reference signal sequence), It is guaranteed that the terminal equipment can stay in sleep state for a longer time and/or can perform PO demodulation for a shorter time under low paging rate, so as to reduce power consumption.
  • PEI such as DCI bit or reference signal sequence
  • the PEI includes: the monitoring state of at least one PO of at least one PF in the same or different DRX cycle and/or the obtaining state of TRS.
  • the step A10 includes at least one of the following:
  • the PF in the configured DRX cycle is configured as a single group, send the PEI before each PO in the first PF of the single group, indicating the monitoring status of the PO corresponding to each PF of the single group and/or the acquisition status of the TRS ;
  • the network device (such as a base station) sends PEI, and the terminal device analyzes the indication information in the PEI before each PO in the first PF of a single group one by one, and the terminal device determines the monitoring of the PO at the corresponding position of each PF in a single group based on the resolved indication information. status and/or acquired status of TRS.
  • the PFs in the configured DRX cycle are configured as multiple groups, send the PEI before each PO in the first PF of each group, respectively indicating the monitoring status and/or PO monitoring status of each PF corresponding to each group.
  • the acquisition status of the TRS includes monitoring, no need to monitor, or partly monitored and partly not needed, and the acquisition status may be available, all unavailable, or partly available and partly unavailable.
  • the network device (such as a base station) sends PEI, and the terminal device polls according to the group PF, and analyzes the indication information in the PEI before each PO in the first PF of each group PF one by one.
  • the monitoring status of POs corresponding to the position of each PF and/or the acquisition status of TRS, that is, there are multiple group PFs in one DRX cycle, and all POs in the same position of all PFs in the group are completed by the pre-PO PEI of the first PF in each group PF Indicate whether the PO listens to paging messages and/or performs time-frequency synchronization through TRS.
  • the step A10 includes at least one of the following:
  • the PF in the configured DRX cycle is configured as a single group, then send the indication information in the PEI before each PO in the first PF of the single group, indicating the PO corresponding to the position of non-consecutive multiple PFs selected by the predetermined rule of the single group
  • the network device (such as a base station) sends PEI, and the terminal device analyzes the indication information in the PEI before each PO in the first PF of a single group PF one by one.
  • the monitoring status of POs corresponding to multiple PFs and/or the acquisition status of TRS.
  • the PFs in the configured DRX cycle are configured as multiple groups, send the indication information in the PEI before each PO in the first PF of each group, respectively indicating the non-consecutive multiple PFs selected by the predetermined rules of each group The monitoring status of the PO and/or the acquisition status of the TRS corresponding to the location.
  • the terminal device polls according to the group PF, and analyzes the indication information in the PEI before each PO in the first PF of each group PF one by one, and the terminal device determines the group PF where the PEI is based on the resolved indication information
  • the PEI completes the indication of the monitoring status of POs at the same position of multiple non-consecutive PFs in the group and/or the TRS acquisition status of the corresponding positions of POs.
  • the predetermined rule can be to determine the number of non-consecutive PFs by selecting the odd and even number of the PF sequence number in the group, the selection of the arithmetic sequence, etc., different from each continuous PF in the group, and the predetermined rule selects a plurality of non-consecutive PFs.
  • PF is applicable to single group and multiple group situations.
  • the default rule is the odd-even number selection method, that is, select the PF with an odd or even number in a group, analyze the PEI before each PO before the first PF in this group, and determine the sequence number The monitoring status of the PO and/or the acquisition status of the TRS corresponding to the odd or even non-consecutive multiple PFs.
  • the default rule is to select multiple non-consecutive PFs with odd serial numbers.
  • a group includes 6 PFs, and each PF has 2 POs.
  • the PFs in the group are PF0, PF1, PF2, PF3, PF4, PF5, the PEI jump before PO0 and PO1 in PF0 at the head of this packet indicates the monitoring status of PO and TRS acquisition status of corresponding positions in PF1, PF3 and PF5. It should be noted that in this optional embodiment, it is only a detailed explanation of the selection of non-consecutive multiple PFs by the preset rules, which may include but not limited to 6 PFs, and also include but not limited to 2 POs per PF .
  • the preset rule can be a plurality of non-contiguous PFs with an even number selected.
  • a group includes 12 PFs, and the PEI jump of the first PF in the group indicates that PF2, PF4, PF6, PF8, PF10 and PF12 correspond to Listening status of the PO and/or acquisition status of the TRS of the location.
  • the preset rule can select the serial number as an arithmetic sequence, and each value of each item is non-continuously multiple PFs.
  • a group includes 12 PFs, and the arithmetic sequence is a sequence whose first item is 0 and the tolerance is 3, and the arithmetic sequence are 0, 3, 6, 9, and 12, so the PEI jump of the first PF in the packet indicates the monitoring status of the PO and/or the acquisition status of the TRS at the corresponding positions of PF3, PF6, PF9 and PF12.
  • the step A10 includes: sending a PEI of a corresponding PO in at least one group of PFs in at least one DRX cycle.
  • the process for the network device to send the PEI may include at least one of the following:
  • the PF in the configured DRX cycle is configured as a single group, then send the indication information in the PEI before each PO in the first PF of the single group, indicating the PO corresponding to the position of non-consecutive multiple PFs selected by the predetermined rule of the single group
  • the PFs in the configured DRX cycle are configured as multiple groups, send the PEI before each PO in the first PF of each group, respectively indicating the monitoring status and/or PO monitoring status of each PF corresponding to each group.
  • the PF in the configured DRX cycle is configured as a single group, then send the indication information in the PEI before each PO in the first PF of the single group, indicating the PO corresponding to the position of non-consecutive multiple PFs selected by the predetermined rule of the single group
  • the PFs in the configured DRX cycle are configured as multiple groups, send the indication information in the PEI before each PO in the first PF of each group, respectively indicating the non-consecutive multiple PFs selected by the predetermined rules of each group The monitoring status of the PO and/or the acquisition status of the TRS corresponding to the location.
  • the method further includes at least one of the following:
  • Sending a tracking reference signal at a paging occasion does not send a paging message.
  • the network device sends the PEI before the PO, and the network device also includes at least one of the following:
  • the network device sends a paging message at the paging occasion, so that the terminal device monitors the PO according to the identification unit of the indication information of the PEI;
  • the network device sends a TRS at the paging occasion, so that the terminal device can perform TRS synchronization according to the identification unit of the indication information of the PEI;
  • the network device sends a paging message and TRS at the paging opportunity, so that the terminal device can monitor the PO and perform TRS synchronization according to the identification unit of the PEI indication information;
  • the network device does not send a paging message at the paging occasion, so that the terminal device does not monitor the PO according to the identification unit of the indication information of the PEI;
  • the network device does not send TRS at the paging occasion, so that the terminal device does not perform TRS synchronization according to the identification unit of the indication information of the PEI;
  • the network device does not send a paging message and does not send a TRS at the paging occasion, so that the terminal device does not monitor the PO and does not perform TRS synchronization according to the identification unit of the PEI indication information;
  • the network device sends a paging message but does not send a TRS at the paging time, so that the terminal device monitors the PO according to the identification unit of the indication information of the PEI and does not perform TRS synchronization;
  • the network device sends TRS and does not send a paging message at the paging occasion, so that the terminal device does not monitor the PO and performs TRS synchronization according to the identification unit of the indication information of the PEI.
  • multiple bits in the PEI correspond to jumps to indicate the monitoring status of multiple PFs at the same position PO, that is, if the identification unit (such as a bit) of the indication information is the first value (such as 1), Then the monitoring state of the PO indicated by the identification unit is monitoring, monitoring the PDCCH and/or PDSCH of the PO indicated by the identification unit; if the identification unit (such as a bit) of the indication information is the second value (such as 0), then the The monitoring state of the PO indicated by the identification unit is not monitored, and the PDCCH and/or PDSCH of the PO indicated by the identification unit is not monitored.
  • the identification unit such as a bit
  • the PEI is 0101, that is, the identification unit of the indication information is 0101 in sequence, and PO1 at the same position in PF0, PF1, PF2, and PF3 is skipped sequentially, then the PDCCH and/or PDSCH of PO1 of PF0 will not be monitored, and the PO1 of PF1 will be monitored.
  • the PDCCH and/or PDSCH does not monitor the PDCCH and/or PDSCH of PO1 of PF2, and monitors the PDCCH and/or PDSCH of PO1 of PF3.
  • the identification unit (such as a subsequence) of the reference signal sequence is the first value, and then the PDCCH and/or PDSCH of the PO indicated by the identification unit is monitored, which is the second value , then the PDCCH and/or PDSCH of the PO indicated by this identification unit is not monitored.
  • the multiple bits of the indication information correspond to jumps to indicate the acquisition status of the TRS corresponding to the same position PO of multiple PFs, that is, if the identification unit of the indication information (such as a bit) is the first value (such as 1), then the acquisition status of the TRS corresponding to the PO indicated by the identification unit is available, and it is determined that the TRS corresponding to the PO indicated by the identification unit is applied to the auxiliary time before PO demodulation Frequency synchronization; and/or, if the identification unit (such as a bit) of the indication information is a second value (such as 0), the acquisition status of the TRS corresponding to the PO indicated by the identification unit is unavailable, and it is determined that the identification unit indicated The TRS corresponding to the PO should not be used for auxiliary time-frequency synchronization before PO demodulation.
  • the TRS corresponding to PO1 of PF0 is not available, and the TRS corresponding to PO1 of PF1 is available , The TRS corresponding to PO1 of PF2 is unavailable, and the TRS corresponding to PO1 of PF3 is available.
  • the TRS-related indication information of the PEI is a reference signal sequence
  • the identification unit (such as a subsequence) of the reference signal sequence is the first value
  • the TRS corresponding to the PO indicated by the identification unit is available and applicable to the PO Time-frequency synchronization before demodulation; and/or, if the identification unit (such as subsequence) of the reference signal sequence is the second value, then the TRS corresponding to the PO indicated by the identification unit is not available.
  • the PEI indication information is explained as follows (taking DCI-based PEI as an example, Sequence-based PEI has the same analysis):
  • the PEI is 01010001, that is, the identification unit of the PO monitoring status indication information (that is, the PO indication) is 0101 in turn, the identification unit of the TRS acquisition status indication information (that is, the TRS availability indication) is 0001, and the PEI jumps in turn to indicate PF0, PF1, PO1 at the same position in PF2 and PF3 does not monitor PO1 of PF0 and the TRS corresponding to PO1 of PF0 is not available, monitors PO1 of PF1 and the corresponding TRS of PO1 of PF1 is not available, does not monitor PO1 of PF2 and the corresponding TRS of PO1 of PF2 is not available 1. Monitoring PO1 of PF3 and the TRS corresponding to PO1 of PF3 is available and can be applied to auxiliary time-frequency synchronization before PO demodulation.
  • the PEI carrying the TRS acquisition indication indicates the acquisition status of the TRS in the entire DRX cycle.
  • each PF in the DRX cycle contains at least one PO
  • the number of PFs in the DRX cycle is relatively large, for example, there are 128 PFs in each DRX cycle, etc.
  • the PEI in this application can be used to indicate only the monitoring status of the PO, or only the acquisition status of the TRS corresponding to the PO, or both the monitoring status of the PO and the acquisition of the TRS corresponding to the PO state.
  • a technical solution is given for PEI to simultaneously indicate PO monitoring status and TRS acquisition status, and the example takes DCI-based as an example, and the design of Sequence-based PEI has the same technical solution.
  • the above-mentioned embodiments and the examples in Figures 5 to 10 show a schematic diagram of PEI indicating only PO monitoring status or PEI indicating only PO TRS acquisition status.
  • PEI can also be used to Simultaneously indicate the PO monitoring status and the TRS acquisition status, as shown in the examples in Figure 14 to Figure 16.
  • the purpose of the TRS availability indication is to enable the terminal equipment to know whether the TRS exists in advance, and to assist the SSB to achieve better downlink synchronization when PO demodulation is required, thereby ensuring the success rate of PO demodulation.
  • this patent also proposes to determine whether the TRS availability indication needs to be indicated according to whether the PO in the PEI needs to monitor. That is, if the bit indicating the PO monitoring status in the PEI is 0, that is, there is no need to monitor the PO, the TRS acquisition indication does not need to occupy a bit, and a reserved bit can be preset instead, which can further save the PEI indication bit.
  • the design scheme is also applicable to SSS-based or TRS-based PEI.
  • the bit indicated by PO in the PEI indication: 0 indicates that this PO does not need to be monitored, and 1 indicates that this PO needs to be monitored;
  • TRS availability indication in PEI: 0 bit indicates that TRS is not available, 1 indicates that TRS is available, reserved bit( Reserved bit) indicates that the bit does not need to be occupied temporarily.
  • the TRS availability indication given in the PEI is valid only when the PO needs to be monitored, and the bit design in Figure 11b is that one PO indication corresponds to one TRS acquisition indication, but only when the PO indication bit is When 1, the TRS availability indication needs to analyze the availability and unavailability.
  • the present application also provides a terminal device.
  • the terminal device includes: a memory and a processor, wherein a computer program is stored in the memory, and when the computer program is executed by the processor, the above-mentioned processing method embodiments are implemented. step.
  • the present application also provides a network device, and the network device includes: a memory and a processor, wherein a computer program is stored in the memory, and when the computer program is executed by the processor, each implementation of the above-mentioned processing method is realized. example steps.
  • the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, where a computer program is stored on the computer-readable storage medium, and when the computer program is executed by a processor, the steps of the above-mentioned processing method are realized.
  • An embodiment of the present application further provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes computer program code, and when the computer program code is run on the computer, the computer is made to execute the methods in the above various possible implementation manners.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a chip, including a memory and a processor.
  • the memory is used to store a computer program
  • the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the device installed with the chip executes the above various possible implementation modes. Methods.
  • Units in the device in the embodiment of the present application may be combined, divided and deleted according to actual needs.
  • the methods of the above embodiments can be implemented by means of software plus a necessary general-purpose hardware platform, and of course also by hardware, but in many cases the former is better implementation.
  • the technical solution of the present application can be embodied in the form of a software product in essence or in other words, the part that contributes to the prior art, and the computer software product is stored in one of the above storage media (such as ROM/RAM, magnetic CD, CD), including several instructions to make a terminal device (which may be a mobile phone, computer, server, controlled terminal, or network device, etc.) execute the method of each embodiment of the present application.
  • all or part of them may be implemented by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof.
  • software When implemented using software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • a computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions according to the embodiments of the present application will be generated in whole or in part.
  • the computer can be a general purpose computer, special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable apparatus.
  • Computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, e.g. Coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) to another website site, computer, server or data center.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer, or a data storage device such as a server, a data center, etc. integrated with one or more available media.
  • Usable media may be magnetic media, (eg, floppy disk, memory disk, magnetic tape), optical media (eg, DVD), or semiconductor media (eg, Solid State Disk (SSD)), among others.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
  • Power Sources (AREA)

Abstract

一种处理方法、终端设备、网络设备及存储介质，所述处理方法应用于终端设备，包括以下步骤：接收PEI，根据所述PEI指示至少一个PF的至少一个PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态；根据所述监听状态确定是否监听寻呼消息，和/或，根据所述TRS的获得状态确定是否通过TRS进行时频同步。通过上述方式，使终端设备在接收寻呼消息过程中，无需长时间处于唤醒状态，以减少功耗。

Description

处理方法、终端设备、网络设备及存储介质 技术领域
本申请涉及无线通信技术领域，具体涉及一种处理方法、终端设备、网络设备及存储介质。
背景技术
第五代(5G，5th Generation)蜂窝移动通信系统中，用户设备(UE，User Equipment)接收寻呼消息的过程包括：在寻呼时机(PO，Paging Occasion)对应搜索空间里检测物理下行控制信道(PDCCH，Physical Downlink Control Channel)，进而解析出携带有寻呼调度信息的下行控制信息(DCI，Downlink Control Information)。如果成功解析到DCI，则基于寻呼调度信息的调度采用物理下行共享信道(PDSCH，Physical DownlinkShare Channe1)资源接收并解调寻呼消息。针对采用非连续接收机(DRX，Discontinuous Reception)工作的UE，如果接收的寻呼消息的标识(ID，Identity document)是UE自身的，则发起连接，否则继续睡眠；如果没有解析到DCI则说明在唤醒(DRX_on)的周期，没有寻呼消息。
在构思及实现本申请过程中，发明人发现至少存在如下问题：UE在接收寻呼消息过程中，需要对每一个PO对应的搜索空间进行检测，UE需要频繁唤醒，或者UE时频同步耗费时间长，UE唤醒时间长，造成UE产生较大功耗。
前面的叙述在于提供一般的背景信息，并不一定构成现有技术。
发明内容
针对上述技术问题，本申请提供一种处理方法、终端设备、网络设备及存储介质，旨在解决UE在接收寻呼消息过程中，功耗大、不节能的技术问题。
为了利于快速阅读和理解本申请的技术方案，在此对本申请权利要求书中提及的主要英文简称进行集中说明，说明内容如下：
寻呼提前指示(PEI，Paging Early Indication)；
寻呼帧(Paging Frame，PF)；
寻呼时机(PO，Paging Occasion)；
跟踪参考信号(TRS，Tracking Reference Signal)；
非连续接收(DRX，Discontinuous Reception)。
PEI是寻呼提前指示的一种可选实现方式，为了清楚、简洁的阐述本申请技术方案，在本申请处理方法、终端设备、网络设备及计算机存储介质的以下各实施例中采用PEI指代所有可能的寻呼提前指示信号，但是并不限定寻呼提前指示仅为PEI。寻呼提前指示还可以为其他系统具有相同指示功能的信号。
为解决上述技术问题，本申请提供一种处理方法，应用于终端设备，包括以下步骤：
S10，接收PEI；
S20，根据所述PEI指示至少一个PF的至少一个PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态；
S30，根据所述监听状态确定是否监听寻呼消息，和/或，根据所述TRS的获得状态确 定是否通过TRS进行时频同步。
可选地，在所述步骤S10之前还包括：
S00，确定至少一个DRX周期内至少一个分组的PF。
可选地，所述步骤S00包括：
依据第一数目和/或第二数目，确定至少一个DRX周期内至少一个分组的PF。
可选地，所述步骤S30，包括以下至少一种：
指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得；
监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO；
监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得；
指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得；
不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO；
不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得；
监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO；
指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得和指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得；
监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得；
监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得；
监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得；
监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得；
不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得。
可选地，所述步骤S20包括：
S21，根据所述PEI，确定同一或不同DRX周期至少一个PF的至少一个PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态。
可选地，所述步骤S21包括以下至少一种：
若配置的DRX周期内的PF被配置为单一分组，则解析单一分组的首个PF中各PO前的PEI中指示信息，确定单一分组的每个PF对应位置的PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态；
若配置的DRX周期内的PF被配置为多个分组，则解析每个分组的首个PF中各PO前的PEI中指示信息，分别确定每个分组的每个PF对应位置的PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态。
可选地，所述步骤S21包括以下至少一种：
若配置的DRX周期内的PF被配置为单一分组，则解析单一分组的首个PF中各PO前的PEI中指示信息，确定单一分组的预定规则选定的非连续多个PF对应位置的PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态；
若配置的DRX周期内的PF被配置为多个分组，则解析每个分组的首个PF中各PO前的PEI中指示信息，分别确定每个分组的预定规则选定的非连续多个PF对应位置的PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态。
可选地，所述步骤S10包括：
接收至少一个DRX周期的至少一组PF中对应的PO的PEI。
可选地，所述步骤S30，包括以下至少一种：
响应于所述PEI中的指示信息标识单元监听PO；
响应于所述PEI中的指示信息标识单元做TRS同步；
响应于所述PEI中的指示信息标识单元监听PO且做TRS同步；
响应于所述PEI中的指示信息标识单元不监听PO；
响应于所述PEI中的指示信息标识单元不做TRS同步；
响应于所述PEI中的指示信息标识单元不监听PO且不做TRS同步。
可选地，所述PEI的指示信息如果同时包括PO指示和TRS获得性指示，仅在所述PO指示需要监听时，所述TRS获得性指示有效。
本申请还提供一种处理方法，应用于终端设备，包括以下步骤：
S100，若分组信息及指示信息满足预设条件，则根据所述分组信息和指示信息，确定至少一个分组的PF的至少一个PO的监听状态和/或TRS获得状态；
S200，根据所述监听状态确定是否监听寻呼消息，和/或，根据所述TRS的获得状态确定是否通过TRS进行时频同步。
可选地，所述分组信息的确定或生成方式，包括以下至少一种：
确定至少一个DRX周期内至少一个分组的PF；
根据第一数目和/或第二数目，生成至少一个DRX周期内至少一个分组的PF。
可选地，所述满足预设条件，包括以下至少一种：
所述指示信息指示的至少一个PF存在于所述至少一个分组；
承载所述指示信息的PEI位于同一分组中的首个PF中的对应PO之前。
可选地，所述步骤S200，包括以下至少一种：
指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得；
监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO；
监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得；
指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得；
不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO；
不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得；
监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO；
指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得和指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得；
监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同 PF的至少一个TRS可获得；
监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得；
监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得；
监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得；
不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得。
可选地，所述步骤S100包括：
S101，根据所述分组信息，确定至少一个DRX周期内至少一个分组的PF；
S102，根据所述指示信息，确定同一或不同DRX周期处于至少一个分组的至少一个PF的至少一个PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态。
可选地，所述步骤S102包括以下至少一种：
若配置的DRX周期内的PF被配置为单一分组，则解析单一分组的首个PF中各PO前的PEI中指示信息，确定单一分组的每个PF对应位置的PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态；
若配置的DRX周期内的PF被配置为多个分组，则解析每个分组的首个PF中各PO前的PEI中指示信息，分别确定每个分组的每个PF对应位置的PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态。
可选地，所述步骤S102包括以下至少一种：
若配置的DRX周期内的PF被配置为单一分组，则解析单一分组的首个PF中各PO前的PEI中指示信息，确定单一分组的预定规则选定的非连续多个PF对应位置的PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态；
若配置的DRX周期内的PF被配置为多个分组，则解析每个分组的首个PF中各PO前的PEI中指示信息，分别确定每个分组的预定规则选定的非连续多个PF对应位置的PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态。
可选地，所述步骤S200，包括以下至少一种：
响应于所述指示信息标识单元监听PO；
响应于所述指示信息标识单元做TRS同步；
响应于所述指示信息标识单元监听PO且做TRS同步；
响应于所述指示信息标识单元不监听PO；
响应于所述指示信息标识单元不做TRS同步；
响应于所述指示信息标识单元不监听PO且不做TRS同步。
可选地，所述PEI的指示信息如果同时包括PO指示和TRS获得性指示，仅在所述PO指示需要监听时，所述TRS获得性指示有效。
本申请还提供一种处理方法，应用于网络设备，包括以下步骤：
A10，向终端设备发送PEI，以使所述终端设备根据所述PEI中的指示信息确定至少一个PF的至少一个PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态；
所述监听状态用于指示确定是否监听寻呼消息，和/或，所述获得状态用于指示确定是否通过TRS进行时频同步。
可选地，在所述步骤A10之前还包括：
A00，确定至少一个DRX周期的分组状态。
可选地，所述步骤A00包括：
依据第一数目和/或第二数目，确定至少一个DRX周期内至少一个分组的PF。
可选地，所述指示信息用于指示以下至少一种情形：
指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得；
监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO；
监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得；
指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得；
不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO；
不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得；
监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO；
指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得和指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得；
监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得；
监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得；
监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得；
监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得；
不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得。
可选地，所述PEI包括，同一或不同DRX周期至少一个PF的至少一个PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态。
可选地，所述步骤A10包括以下至少一种：
若配置的DRX周期内的PF被配置为单一分组，则发送单一分组的首个PF中各PO前的PEI中指示信息，指示单一分组的每个PF对应位置的PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态；
若配置的DRX周期内的PF被配置为多个分组，则发送每个分组的首个PF中各PO前的PEI中指示信息，分别指示每个分组的每个PF对应位置的PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态。
可选地，所述步骤A10包括以下至少一种：
若配置的DRX周期内的PF被配置为单一分组，则发送单一分组的首个PF中各PO前的PEI中指示信息，指示单一分组的预定规则选定的非连续多个PF对应位置的PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态；
若配置的DRX周期内的PF被配置为多个分组，则发送每个分组的首个PF中各PO前的PEI中指示信息，分别指示每个分组的预定规则选定的非连续多个PF对应位置的PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态。
可选地，所述步骤A10包括：
发送至少一个DRX周期的至少一组PF中对应的PO的PEI。
可选地，所述方法包括以下至少一种：
在寻呼时机发送寻呼消息；
在寻呼时机发送跟踪参考信号；
在寻呼时机发送寻呼消息且发送跟踪参考信号；
在寻呼时机不发送寻呼消息；
在寻呼时机不发送跟踪参考信号；
在寻呼时机不发送寻呼消息且不发送跟踪参考信号；
在寻呼时机发送寻呼消息不发送跟踪参考信号；
在寻呼时机发送跟踪参考信号不发送寻呼消息。
可选地，所述PEI的指示信息如果同时包括PO指示和TRS获得性指示，仅在所述PO指示需要监听时，所述TRS获得性指示有效。
本申请还提供一种终端设备，所述终端设备包括：存储器和处理器，其中，所述存储器上存储有计算机程序，所述计算机程序被所述处理器执行时实现上述方法的步骤。
本申请还提供一种网络设备，所述网络设备包括：存储器和处理器，其中，所述存储器上存储有计算机程序，所述计算机程序被所述处理器执行时实现如上述的处理方法的步骤。
本申请还提供一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质上存储有计算机程序，所述计算机程序被处理器执行时实现上述方法的步骤。
如上所述，本申请的处理方法，应用于终端设备，接收PEI，并通过PEI指示至少一个PF的至少一个PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态，再根据所述监听状态确定是否监听寻呼消息，和/或，根据所述TRS的获得状态确定是否通过TRS进行时频同步，在终端设备接收寻呼消息过程中，减少终端设备唤醒次数和/或缩短终端设备唤醒的时间，减少终端设备的功耗，提高终端设备的续航能力。
附图说明
此处的附图被并入说明书中并构成本说明书的一部分，示出了符合本申请的实施例，并与说明书一起用于解释本申请的原理。为了更清楚地说明本申请实施例的技术方案，下面将对实施例描述中所需要使用的附图作简单地介绍，显而易见地，对于本领域普通技术人员而言，在不付出创造性劳动性的前提下，还可以根据这些附图获得其他的附图。
图1为实现本申请各个实施例的一种移动终端的硬件结构示意图；
图2为本申请实施例提供的一种通信网络系统架构图；
图3为本申请处理方法应用在终端设备一实施例的流程示意图；
图4为PEI连续指示PO监听状态的场景示意图；
图5为PEI跳跃指示多个PF的至少一个PO监听状态的一实施例场景示意图；
图6为PEI跳跃指示多个PF的至少一个PO监听状态的又一实施例场景示意图；
图7为PEI跳跃指示多个PF的至少一个PO监听状态的另一实施例场景示意图；
图8a为PEI跳跃指示多个PF的至少一个PO监听状态的再一实施例的场景示意图第一部分；
图8b为图8a中接着场景示意图第一部分的第二部分；
图9为PEI跳跃指示多个PF的至少一个PO对应TRS的获得状态的一实施例场景示意图；
图10为PEI跳跃指示多个PF的至少一个PO对应TRS的获得状态的又一实施例场景示意图；
图11a为PEI的指示信息的数据结构示意图；
图11b为PEI的标识单元的指示逻辑场景示意图
图12为本申请处理方法应用在终端设备又一实施例的流程示意图；
图13为本申请处理方法应用在网络设备一实施例的流程示意图；
图14为PEI跳跃指示多个PF的至少一个PO监听状态和对应TRS的获得状态的一实施例场景示意图；
图15为PEI跳跃指示多个PF的至少一个PO监听状态和对应TRS的获得状态的又一实施例场景示意图；
图16为PEI跳跃指示多个PF的至少一个PO监听状态和对应TRS的获得状态的再一实施例场景示意图。
本申请目的的实现、功能特点及优点将结合实施例，参照附图做进一步说明。通过上述附图，已示出本申请明确的实施例，后文中将有更详细的描述。这些附图和文字描述并不是为了通过任何方式限制本申请构思的范围，而是通过参考特定实施例为本领域技术人员说明本申请的概念。
具体实施方式
这里将详细地对示例性实施例进行说明，其示例表示在附图中。下面的描述涉及附图时，除非另有表示，不同附图中的相同数字表示相同或相似的要素。以下示例性实施例中所描述的实施方式并不代表与本申请相一致的所有实施方式。相反，它们仅是与如所附权利要求书中所详述的、本申请的一些方面相一致的装置和方法的例子。
需要说明的是，在本文中，术语“包括”、“包含”或者其任何其他变体意在涵盖非排他性的包含，从而使得包括一系列要素的过程、方法、物品或者装置不仅包括那些要素，而且还包括没有明确列出的其他要素，或者是还包括为这种过程、方法、物品或者装置所固有的要素。在没有更多限制的情况下，由语句“包括一个……”限定的要素，并不排除在包括该要素的过程、方法、物品或者装置中还存在另外的相同要素，可选地，本申请不同实施例中具有同样命名的部件、特征、要素可能具有相同含义，也可能具有不同含义，其具体含义需以其在该具体实施例中的解释或者进一步结合该具体实施例中上下文进行确定。
应当理解，尽管在本文可能采用术语第一、第二、第三等来描述各种信息，但这些信息不应限于这些术语。这些术语仅用来将同一类型的信息彼此区分开。例如，在不脱离本文范围的情况下，第一信息也可以被称为第二信息，类似地，第二信息也可以被称为第一 信息。取决于语境，如在此所使用的词语"如果"可以被解释成为"在……时"或"当……时"或"响应于确定"。可选地，如同在本文中所使用的，单数形式“一”、“一个”和“该”旨在也包括复数形式，除非上下文中有相反的指示。应当进一步理解，术语“包含”、“包括”表明存在所述的特征、步骤、操作、元件、组件、项目、种类、和/或组，但不排除一个或多个其他特征、步骤、操作、元件、组件、项目、种类、和/或组的存在、出现或添加。本申请使用的术语“或”、“和/或”、“包括以下至少一个”等可被解释为包括性的，或意味着任一个或任何组合。例如，“包括以下至少一个：A、B、C”意味着“以下任一个：A；B；C；A和B；A和C；B和C；A和B和C”，再如，“A、B或C”或者“A、B和/或C”意味着“以下任一个：A；B；C；A和B；A和C；B和C；A和B和C”。仅当元件、功能、步骤或操作的组合在某些方式下内在地互相排斥时，才会出现该定义的例外。
应该理解的是，虽然本申请实施例中的流程图中的各个步骤按照箭头的指示依次显示，但是这些步骤并不是必然按照箭头指示的顺序依次执行。除非本文中有明确的说明，这些步骤的执行并没有严格的顺序限制，其可以以其他的顺序执行。而且，图中的至少一部分步骤可以包括多个子步骤或者多个阶段，这些子步骤或者阶段并不必然是在同一时刻执行完成，而是可以在不同的时刻执行，其执行顺序也不必然是依次进行，而是可以与其他步骤或者其他步骤的子步骤或者阶段的至少一部分轮流或者交替地执行。
取决于语境，如在此所使用的词语“如果”、“若”可以被解释成为“在……时”或“当……时”或“响应于确定”或“响应于检测”。类似地，取决于语境，短语“如果确定”或“如果检测(陈述的条件或事件)”可以被解释成为“当确定时”或“响应于确定”或“当检测(陈述的条件或事件)时”或“响应于检测(陈述的条件或事件)”。
需要说明的是，在本文中，采用了诸如S10、S20等步骤代号，其目的是为了更清楚简要地表述相应内容，不构成顺序上的实质性限制，本领域技术人员在具体实施时，可能会先执行S20后执行S10等，但这些均应在本申请的保护范围之内。
应当理解，此处所描述的具体实施例仅仅用以解释本申请，并不用于限定本申请。
在后续的描述中，使用用于表示元件的诸如“模块”、“部件”或者“单元”的后缀仅为了有利于本申请的说明，其本身没有特定的意义。因此，“模块”、“部件”或者“单元”可以混合地使用。
终端设备可以为移动终端，移动终端可以以各种形式来实施。例如，本申请中描述的移动终端可以包括诸如手机、平板电脑、笔记本电脑、掌上电脑、个人数字助理(Personal Digital Assistant，PDA)、便捷式媒体播放器(Portable Media Player，PMP)、导航装置、可穿戴设备、智能手环、计步器等移动终端，以及诸如数字TV、台式计算机等固定终端。
后续描述中将以移动终端为例进行说明，本领域技术人员将理解的是，除了特别用于移动目的的元件之外，根据本申请的实施方式的构造也能够应用于固定类型的终端。
请参阅图1，其为实现本申请各个实施例的一种移动终端的硬件结构示意图，该移动终端100可以包括：RF(Radio Frequency，射频)单元101、WiFi模块102、音频输出单元103、A/V(音频/视频)输入单元104、传感器105、显示单元106、用户输入单元107、接口单元108、存储器109、处理器110、以及电源111等部件。本领域技术人员可以理解，图1中示出的移动终端结构并不构成对移动终端的限定，移动终端可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件，或者组合某些部件，或者不同的部件布置。
下面结合图1对移动终端的各个部件进行具体的介绍：
射频单元101可用于收发信息或通话过程中，信号的接收和发送，具体的，将基站的下行信息接收后，给处理器110处理；另外，将上行的数据发送给基站。通常，射频单元 101包括但不限于天线、至少一个放大器、收发信机、耦合器、低噪声放大器、双工器等。可选地，射频单元101还可以通过无线通信与网络和其他设备通信。上述无线通信可以使用任一通信标准或协议，包括但不限于GSM(Global System of Mobile communication，全球移动通讯系统)、GPRS(General Packet Radio Service，通用分组无线服务)、CDMA2000(Code Division Multiple Access 2000，码分多址2000)、WCDMA(Wideband Code Division Multiple Access,宽带码分多址)、TD-SCDMA(Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access，时分同步码分多址)、FDD-LTE(Frequency Division Duplexing-Long Term Evolution，频分双工长期演进)和TDD-LTE(Time Division Duplexing-Long Term Evolution，分时双工长期演进)等。
WiFi属于短距离无线传输技术，移动终端通过WiFi模块102可以帮助用户收发电子邮件、浏览网页和访问流式媒体等，它为用户提供了无线的宽带互联网访问。虽然图1示出了WiFi模块102，但是可以理解的是，其并不属于移动终端的必须构成，完全可以根据需要在不改变发明的本质的范围内而省略。
音频输出单元103可以在移动终端100处于呼叫信号接收模式、通话模式、记录模式、语音识别模式、广播接收模式等等模式下时，将射频单元101或WiFi模块102接收的或者在存储器109中存储的音频数据转换成音频信号并且输出为声音。而且，音频输出单元103还可以提供与移动终端100执行的特定功能相关的音频输出(例如，呼叫信号接收声音、消息接收声音等等)。音频输出单元103可以包括扬声器、蜂鸣器等等。
A/V输入单元104用于接收音频或视频信号。A/V输入单元104可以包括图形处理器(Graphics Processing Unit，GPU)1041和麦克风1042，图形处理器1041对在视频捕获模式或图像捕获模式中由图像捕获装置(如摄像头)获得的静态图片或视频的图像数据进行处理。处理后的图像帧可以显示在显示单元106上。经图形处理器1041处理后的图像帧可以存储在存储器109(或其它存储介质)中或者经由射频单元101或WiFi模块102进行发送。麦克风1042可以在电话通话模式、记录模式、语音识别模式等等运行模式中经由麦克风1042接收声音(音频数据)，并且能够将这样的声音处理为音频数据。处理后的音频(语音)数据可以在电话通话模式的情况下转换为可经由射频单元101发送到移动通信基站的格式输出。麦克风1042可以实施各种类型的噪声消除(或抑制)算法以消除(或抑制)在接收和发送音频信号的过程中产生的噪声或者干扰。
移动终端100还包括至少一种传感器105，比如光传感器、运动传感器以及其他传感器。可选地，光传感器包括环境光传感器及接近传感器，可选地，环境光传感器可根据环境光线的明暗来调节显示面板1061的亮度，接近传感器可在移动终端100移动到耳边时，关闭显示面板1061和/或背光。作为运动传感器的一种，加速计传感器可检测各个方向上(一般为三轴)加速度的大小，静止时可检测出重力的大小及方向，可用于识别手机姿态的应用(比如横竖屏切换、相关游戏、磁力计姿态校准)、振动识别相关功能(比如计步器、敲击)等；至于手机还可配置的指纹传感器、压力传感器、虹膜传感器、分子传感器、陀螺仪、气压计、湿度计、温度计、红外线传感器等其他传感器，在此不再赘述。
显示单元106用于显示由用户输入的信息或提供给用户的信息。显示单元106可包括显示面板1061，可以采用液晶显示器(Liquid Crystal Display，LCD)、有机发光二极管(Organic Light-Emitting Diode,OLED)等形式来配置显示面板1061。
用户输入单元107可用于接收输入的数字或字符信息，以及产生与移动终端的用户设置以及功能控制有关的键信号输入。可选地，用户输入单元107可包括触控面板1071以及其他输入设备1072。触控面板1071，也称为触摸屏，可收集用户在其上或附近的触摸操作(比如用户使用手指、触笔等任何适合的物体或附件在触控面板1071上或在触控面板1071附近的操作)，并根据预先设定的程式驱动相应的连接装置。触控面板1071可包 括触摸检测装置和触摸控制器两个部分。可选地，触摸检测装置检测用户的触摸方位，并检测触摸操作带来的信号，将信号传送给触摸控制器；触摸控制器从触摸检测装置上接收触摸信息，并将它转换成触点坐标，再送给处理器110，并能接收处理器110发来的命令并加以执行。可选地，可以采用电阻式、电容式、红外线以及表面声波等多种类型实现触控面板1071。除了触控面板1071，用户输入单元107还可以包括其他输入设备1072。可选地，其他输入设备1072可以包括但不限于物理键盘、功能键(比如音量控制按键、开关按键等)、轨迹球、鼠标、操作杆等中的一种或多种，具体此处不做限定。
可选地，触控面板1071可覆盖显示面板1061，当触控面板1071检测到在其上或附近的触摸操作后，传送给处理器110以确定触摸事件的类型，随后处理器110根据触摸事件的类型在显示面板1061上提供相应的视觉输出。虽然在图1中，触控面板1071与显示面板1061是作为两个独立的部件来实现移动终端的输入和输出功能，但是在某些实施例中，可以将触控面板1071与显示面板1061集成而实现移动终端的输入和输出功能，具体此处不做限定。
接口单元108用作至少一个外部装置与移动终端100连接可以通过的接口。例如，外部装置可以包括有线或无线头戴式耳机端口、外部电源(或电池充电器)端口、有线或无线数据端口、存储卡端口、用于连接具有识别模块的装置的端口、音频输入/输出(I/O)端口、视频I/O端口、耳机端口等等。接口单元108可以用于接收来自外部装置的输入(例如，数据信息、电力等等)并且将接收到的输入传输到移动终端100内的一个或多个元件或者可以用于在移动终端100和外部装置之间传输数据。
存储器109可用于存储软件程序以及各种数据。存储器109可主要包括存储程序区和存储数据区，可选地，存储程序区可存储操作系统、至少一个功能所需的应用程序(比如声音播放功能、图像播放功能等)等；存储数据区可存储根据手机的使用所创建的数据(比如音频数据、电话本等)等。可选地，存储器109可以包括高速随机存取存储器，还可以包括非易失性存储器，例如至少一个磁盘存储器件、闪存器件、或其他易失性固态存储器件。
处理器110是移动终端的控制中心，利用各种接口和线路连接整个移动终端的各个部分，通过运行或执行存储在存储器109内的软件程序和/或模块，以及调用存储在存储器109内的数据，执行移动终端的各种功能和处理数据，从而对移动终端进行整体监控。处理器110可包括一个或多个处理单元；优选的，处理器110可集成应用处理器和调制解调处理器，可选地，应用处理器主要处理操作系统、用户界面和应用程序等，调制解调处理器主要处理无线通信。可以理解的是，上述调制解调处理器也可以不集成到处理器110中。
移动终端100还可以包括给各个部件供电的电源111(比如电池)，优选的，电源111可以通过电源管理系统与处理器110逻辑相连，从而通过电源管理系统实现管理充电、放电、以及功耗管理等功能。
尽管图1未示出，移动终端100还可以包括蓝牙模块等，在此不再赘述。
为了便于理解本申请实施例，下面对本申请的移动终端所基于的通信网络系统进行描述。
请参阅图2，图2为本申请实施例提供的一种通信网络系统架构图，该通信网络系统为通用移动通信技术的LTE系统，该LTE系统包括依次通讯连接的UE(User Equipment，用户设备)201，E-UTRAN(Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network，演进式UMTS陆地无线接入网)202，EPC(Evolved Packet Core，演进式分组核心网)203和运营商的IP业务204。
可选地，UE201可以是上述终端100，此处不再赘述。
E-UTRAN202包括eNodeB2021和其它eNodeB2022等。可选地，eNodeB2021可以通过回程(backhaul)(例如X2接口)与其它eNodeB2022连接，eNodeB2021连接到EPC203，eNodeB2021可以提供UE201到EPC203的接入。
EPC203可以包括MME(Mobility Management Entity，移动性管理实体)2031，HSS(Home Subscriber Server，归属用户服务器)2032，其它MME2033，SGW(Serving Gate Way，服务网关)2034，PGW(PDN Gate Way，分组数据网络网关)2035和PCRF(Policy and Charging Rules Function，政策和资费功能实体)2036等。可选地，MME2031是处理UE201和EPC203之间信令的控制节点，提供承载和连接管理。HSS2032用于提供一些寄存器来管理诸如归属位置寄存器(图中未示)之类的功能，并且保存有一些有关服务特征、数据速率等用户专用的信息。所有用户数据都可以通过SGW2034进行发送，PGW2035可以提供UE 201的IP地址分配以及其它功能，PCRF2036是业务数据流和IP承载资源的策略与计费控制策略决策点，它为策略与计费执行功能单元(图中未示)选择及提供可用的策略和计费控制决策。
IP业务204可以包括因特网、内联网、IMS(IP Multimedia Subsystem，IP多媒体子系统)或其它IP业务等。
虽然上述以LTE系统为例进行了介绍，但本领域技术人员应当知晓，本申请不仅仅适用于LTE系统，也可以适用于其他无线通信系统，例如GSM、CDMA2000、WCDMA、TD-SCDMA以及未来新的网络系统等，此处不做限定。
基于上述移动终端硬件结构以及通信网络系统，提出本申请各个实施例。
本申请处理方法可应用于寻呼消息和/或寻呼指示的处理和传输过程，本申请的处理方法的应用场景可以是一种无线通信系统，无线通信系统可以是基于蜂窝移动通信技术的通信系统，该无线通信系统可以包括：若干个终端设备和若干个网络设备，网络设备一般为基站。
可选地，终端设备可以是指向用户提供语音和/或数据连通性的设备。终端设备可以经过无线接入网(Radio Access Network，RAN)与一个或多个核心网进行通信，终端设备也可以是物联网终端，如传感器设备、移动终端和具有物联网终端的计算机，例如，可以是固定式、便携式、袖珍式、手持式、计算机内置的或者车载的装置。例如，站(Station，STA)、订户单元(Subscriber Unit)、订户站(Subscriber Station)、移动站(Mobile Station)、移动台(Mobile)、远程站(Remote Station)、接入点、远程终端(Remote Terminal)、接入终端(Access Terminal)、用户装置(User Terminal)、用户代理(User Agent)、用户设备(User Device)、或用户终端(User Equipment，UE)。或者，终端设备也可以是无人飞行器的设备。或者，终端设备也可以是车载设备，比如，可以是具有无线通信功能的行车电脑，或者是外接行车电脑的无线通信设备。或者，终端设备也可以是路边设备，比如，可以是具有无线通信功能的路灯、信号灯或者其它路边设备等。
基站可以是无线通信系统中的网络侧设备，可选地，该无线通信系统可以是第四代移动通信技术(the 4th generation mobile communication，4G)系统，又称长期演进(Long Term Evolution，LTE)系统；或者，该无线通信系统也可以是5G系统，又称新空口(new radio，NR)系统或5G NR系统。或者，该无线通信系统也可以是5G系统的再下一代系统。可选地，5G系统中的接入网可以称为NG-RAN(New Generation-Radio Access Network，新一代无线接入网)。
可选地，基站可以是4G系统中采用的演进型基站(eNB)。或者，基站也可以是5G系统中采用集中分布式架构的基站(gNB)。当基站采用集中分布式架构时，通常包括集中单元(central unit,CU)和至少两个分布单元(Distributed Unit，DU)。集中单元中设 置有分组数据汇聚协议(Packet Data Convergence Protocol，PDCP)层、无线链路层控制协议(Radio Link Control，RLC)层、媒体访问控制(Media Access Control，MAC)层的协议栈；分布单元中设置有物理(Physical，PHY)层协议栈，本公开实施例对基站的具体实现方式不加以限定。
基站和终端设备之间可以通过无线空口建立无线连接。在不同的实施方式中，该无线空口是基于第四代移动通信网络技术(4G)标准的无线空口；或者，该无线空口是基于第五代移动通信网络技术(5G)标准的无线空口，比如该无线空口是新空口；或者，该无线空口也可以是基于下一代移动通信网络技术标准的无线空口。
在一些实施例中，终端设备之间还可以建立E2E(End to End，端到端)连接。比如车联网通信(Vehicle to everything，V2X)中的V2V(Vehicle to Vehicle，车对车)通信、V2I(Vehicle to Infrastructure，车对路边设备)通信和V2P(Vehicle to Pedestrian，车对人)通信等场景。
在一些实施例中，上述无线通信系统还可以包含网络管理设备。
若干个基站分别与网络管理设备相连。可选地，网络管理设备可以是无线通信系统中的核心网设备，比如，该网络管理设备可以是演进的数据分组核心网(Evol vedPacket Core,EPC)中的移动性管理实体(Mobility Management Entity，MME)。或者，该网络管理设备也可以是其它的核心网设备，比如服务网关(Serving GateWay，SGW)、公用数据网网关(Public Data Network GateWay，PGW)、策略与计费规则功能单元(Policy and Charging Rules Function，PCRF)或者归属签约用户服务器(Home Subscriber Server,HSS)等。对于网络管理设备的实现形态，本公开实施例不做限定。
本申请公开实施例涉及的执行主体包括但不限于：支持蜂窝移动通信的手机终端等UE，和/或基站等网络设备。
为辅助理解本申请的各实施例技术方案，在部分或全部实施例中，终端设备可为UE，网络设备可为基站。
在UE的寻呼消息接收与处理过程中，本申请发明人发现以下问题或缺陷：
(1)RRC(Radio Resource Control，无线资源控制)idle/inactive态的UE需要在每个寻呼周期通过监听PO(Paging Occasion，寻呼时机)来确认是否需要解码寻呼PDCCH(Physical Downlink Control Channel，物理下行控制信道)/PDSCH(Physical Downlink Share Channe1，物理下行共享信道)。
当UE没有被寻呼时，这种无效的PO监听和寻呼PDCCH、SSB(Synchronization Signal Block,同步信号块)处理会造成很大的功耗。为应对此缺陷，确定了通过PEI(Paging Early Indication，寻呼提前指示)指示的方式去提前决定是否需要进行PO监听，在没有寻呼消息时，可以避免不必要的SSB同步处理和寻呼PDCCH解码，如此就可以达到减少功耗的目的。
为了进一步减少功耗，本申请提出：可以通过一个PEI指示至少一个PO是否需要监听的技术方案，例如通过一个DCI(Downlink Control Information，下行控制信息)-based PEI指示至少一个PO是否需要监听。
(2)为了使RRC_IDLE/RRC_INACTIVE态的UE更好的实现PO解调，支持RRC_IDLE/RRC_INACTIVE态的UE配置TRS(Tracking Reference Signal，共享跟踪参考信号)/CSI-RS(Channel State Information-Reference Signal，信道状态信息参考信号)。但是TRS/CSI-RS的获得性指示通过PEI、paging DCI还是SIB1(System Information B1ock 1，专用系统消息块)承载并未达成共识，且如果通过PEI进行TRS/CSI-RS获得性 指示时，一个PEI承载至少一个PO对应的TRS/CSI-RS的获得性指示，以及如何进行指示还未有既定方案。
本申请实施例技术方案主要用于解决如下技术问题：
(1)如果通过PEI指示PO是否监听时，一个PEI如何指示DRX周期内的至少一个PO的监听状态，且PEI指示如何设计可以尽可能减少UE被唤醒的次数，从而减少能耗；和/或，
(2)如果通过PEI指示TRS/CSI-RS的获得性状态，一个PEI如何实现至少一个TRS/CSI-RS获得性指示，以便UE可以提前确认是否可以通过TRS进行辅助时频同步，进而减少UE用于时频同步SSB个数，以此减少系统能耗。
通过本申请实施例技术方案，可以解决上述问题(1)和/或问题(2)。
可选地，为辅助理解本申请处理方法的各实施例，对本申请实施例的相关背景进行简要介绍：
关于NR寻呼技术，依据协议TS 38.300RRC_INACTIVE
寻呼目的在于发送寻呼信息(Paging message)给终端、通知系统消息改变以及紧急消息(ETWS/CMAS indications)，终端设备在RRC_IDLE态(非连续接收状态)仅监听CN(Core Network，核心网)发起的(CN-initiated)的寻呼信息，终端设备在RRC_IDLE态或RRC_INACTIVE态(休眠状态)，监听CN发起(CN-initiated)的寻呼信息以及监听RAN(Radio Access Network，无线接入网)发起(RAN-initiated)的寻呼信息。终端设备在RRC_IDLE态或RRC_INACTIVE态不需要时刻监听寻呼信道(paging channel)，而是随着网路配置的最短的一个DRX周期监听一个PO，因此一个寻呼周期也可以称为Paging DRX。网路配置的DRX包含以下三种：
1.针对核心网发起的寻呼。
2.默认周期(Default Cycle)：由系统消息配置。
3.终端特定周期(UE specific cycle)：由NAS(Non-Access Stratum，非接入层)信令配置。
针对无线网发起的寻呼，终端特定周期(UE-specific cycle)：由RRC(Radio Resource Control，无线资源控制)信令配置，终端设备在依据现在所处的RRC状态中，选择配置周期中最短周期为监听周期。也就是终端设备在RRC_IDLE需从“Default Cycle”或“UE Specific Cycle”中选择最短周期，而当终端设备在RRC_INACTIVE态则从上述三种周期中选择一个最短的。
不论是核心网发起或是无线网发起的寻呼，终端设备都是依据相同的“UE_ID”(寻呼消息的标识(ID，Identity document))确认寻呼时机。
寻呼时机计算方式：i_s＝floor(UE_ID/N)mod Ns。
寻呼帧的确定方式：(SFN+PF_offset)mod T＝(T div N)*(UE_ID mod N)。
终端设备在所属的寻呼时机监听并检测(detect)是否有P-RNTI加扰的PDCCH以确认是否携带寻呼消息：如果有，则再进一步解析(decode)PDSCH上所发送的寻呼消息(Paging message)。
为使UE在接收寻呼消息过程中，减少功耗，本申请提供一种处理方法，应用于终端设备(即UE)，在一实施例中，参照图3，所述处理方法包括以下步骤：
S10，接收PEI；
S20，根据所述PEI指示至少一个PF的至少一个PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态；
S30，根据所述监听状态确定是否监听寻呼消息，和/或，根据所述TRS的获得状态确 定是否通过TRS进行时频同步。
在终端设备接收寻呼消息的过程中，终端设备在每个分组的首个PF中各PO前的固定位置获取各个PF中对应的PO的PEI，PEI中包含至少一种指示信息。
在一实现方式中，指示信息可以用于指示当前时刻以及当前时刻之后的至少一个PF(Paging Frame,寻呼帧)中的PO的监听状态，即指示信息可以预先指示至少一个PF中的PO是否需要监听，终端设备在接收到PEI之后，可根据指示信息提前知晓后续至少一个PF中的PO的监听状态，终端设备可在后续监听状态为不监听的寻呼时机继续保持休眠，仅在后续需要进行监听的寻呼时机唤醒，因此终端设备可以根据PEI中的指示信息，依据PO的监听状态，针对性的被唤醒，从而避免在每一个寻呼时机频繁唤醒进行搜索空间检测，进而实现终端设备功耗节省。
在另一实现方式中，指示信息也可以用于指示当前时刻以及当前时刻之后的至少一个PF中的PO对应的TRS(Tracking Reference Signal，跟踪参考信号)的获得状态，即指示信息可以预先指示至少一个PF中PO的TRS是否可以获得，终端设备在接收到PEI之后，根据指示信息提前知晓后续至少一个PF中的PO对应的TRS的获得状态，可在后续TRS为可以获得且需要进行PO监听时，通过TRS进行辅助时频同步，快速实现下行同步，完成PO解调。如此便可以减少终端设备用于下行同步的SSB个数，缩短终端设备的同步时长，减少终端设备的功耗。
可选地，终端设备如果有TRS进行辅助时频同步，可能仅需要解析一个SSB，而如果没有TRS进行辅助时频同步，可能需要解析三个SSB，减少用于下行同步的SSB个数，可缩短下行同步时长，进而减少终端设备唤醒的时间。
在又一实现方式中，指示信息可以指示前时刻以及当前时刻之后的至少一个PF中的PO的监听状态和对应的TRS的获得状态，即指示信息可以预先指示至少一个PF中的PO是否需要监听且对应的TRS是否可以获得，终端设备在接收到PEI之后，可根据指示信息提前知晓后续至少一个PF中的PO的监听状态，终端设备可在后续无需监听的寻呼时机继续保持休眠，仅在后续需要进行监听的寻呼时机唤醒，从而避免在每一个寻呼时机频繁唤醒及进行搜索空间检测，增加寻呼时机的休眠时长，减少了终端设备的功耗。指示信息还可以预先指示至少一个PF中PO对应的TRS是否可以获得，特别用于预先指示至少一个PF需要监听的PO的对应的TRS是否可以获得。在需要监听且TRS为可获得的寻呼时机，终端设备可以选择通过TRS进行辅助时频同步，缩短终端设备进行PO解调的时长，进而实现终端设备省功耗。
在本实施例中，接收PEI，并通过PEI中指示信息确定至少一个PF的至少一个PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态，再根据所述监听状态确定是否监听寻呼消息，和/或，根据所述TRS的获得状态确定是否通过TRS进行时频同步，在终端设备接收寻呼消息过程中，减少终端设备唤醒次数和/或减少终端设备唤醒时间，从而减少终端设备的功耗。
为辅助理解关于TRS的获得状态相关技术内容，以下对TRS的相关研究做简要说明。
在寻呼处理的研究过程中，TRS/CSI-RS可以用于供UE获取信道的状态、波束管理、移动性管理和速率匹配等。
基站和UE物理晶振的频率是会有小小的偏差的，不能做到完全一致，这使得UE接收到的射频载波信号会有相位上的偏差，在接收子载波的解调符号星座图上，表现为相位上的旋转，即接收的调制符号偏离了一定的相位角度，这是由于频偏在时间上的积累造成的。这时，需要TRS来追踪其它数据信号的旋转相位。TRS是一种多周期的TRS/CSI-RS，确切的说是一个4-1端口，3个TRS/CSI-RS密度，位于连续两个时隙的NZP-TRS/CSI-RS， 在一个时隙内时间上两个TRS最小间隔是4个OFDM符号，颇域上间隔4个子载波。可以根据TRS来估算频率和时间上的误差。接收数据补偿这些误差，即可旋回原始发送的调制坐标位置。
共享的TRS/CSI-RS可以是供空闲态UE和/或非激活态UE，与连接态UE共享的TRS/CSI-RS。空闲态UE和/或非激活态UE，与连接态UE可以在共享的TRS/CSI-RS时机对TRS/CSI-RS进行监听。共享的TRS/CSI-RS还可以用于供UE进行与基站的下行同步。完成下行同步后的UE可以接收基站的下行信号。
在终端设备处于RRC_IDLE态或RRC_INACTIVE态的UE支持TRS/CSI-RS功能，以更好的实现同步功能，进而更好地实现PO解调。
本申请支持通过PEI实现TRS/CSI-RS的获得性指示(即PEI中TRS相关指示信息)，且支持一个PEI支持至少一个PO对应的TRS/CSI-RS的获得性指示，具体实现思路如下：
若每个PO对应的TRS/CSI-RS的获得性指示不同时，一个PEI指示至少一个PF的对应位置的TRS/CSI-RS的获得状态，比在每个PF的每个PO前放置一个PEI指示TRS/CSI-RS的获得状态更节省信号资源；同时TRS/CSI-RS还可以用于辅助下行同步，缩短PO解调时长。PEI跳跃指示TRS的获得状态与PEI跳跃指示PO的监听状态的指示方式基本相同。
在以上实施例的基础上，发明人发现：一个PEI的指示信息可指示PF中连续至少一个PO，但是这种连续指示至少一个PO的方式比较占用PEI的可用资源，如PEI为DCI-based PEI(通过DCI bit映射的方式承载寻呼指示)，则PEI连续指示至少一个PO比较浪费DCI bit的占用资源，例如，参照图4，如果一个PF有12个PO，连续指示12个PF，就需要144bit，造成bit位的浪费；如PEI为SSS-based PEI(通过SSS(Secondary Synchronization Signa1，辅同步信号)参考信号映射的方式承载PEI)或TRS-based PEI，基于SSS序列或TRS序列，则需要144个序列来实现连续PO的指示，造成序列的浪费。
基于此问题，本申请进一步提出另一实施例，一个PEI的指示信息跳跃指示至少一个PF中每个PF预设映射位置的至少一个PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态，预设映射位置可以是每个PF中相同位置(即PO在PF中的排序位置相同)，即所述指示信息用于指示至少一个PF同一位置的PO的监听状态，在一可选实施方式中，可以为以下至少一种：
第一个PF的第一个PEI的指示信息跳跃指示：第一个PF的第一个PO、第二个PF的第一个PO、第三个PF的第一个PO；
第一个PF的第二个PEI的指示信息跳跃指示：第一个PF的第二个PO、第二个PF的第二个PO、第三个PF的第二个PO；
第一个PF的第三个PEI的指示信息跳跃指示：第一个PF的第三个PO、第二个PF的第三个PO、第三个PF的第三个PO。
上面仅为相同位置的一个详细解释，可以包括但不限于三个PF，也包括但不限于每个PF有三个PO。
可选地，预设映射位置也可以是每个PF中非相同位置，只要PEI完成至少一个PF中所有PO的跳跃指示即可。如PEI的指示信息跳跃指示至少一个PF中排序位置逐个递增的位置处的PO直至遍历指示PF中所有PO，即所述指示信息用于指示至少一个PF不同位置的PO的监听状态，在一可选实施方式中，可以为以下至少一种：
第一个PF的第一个PEI的指示信息跳跃指示：第一个PF的第一个PO、第二PF的第二个PO、第三PF的第三个PO；
第一个PF的第二个PEI的指示信息跳跃指示：第一个PF的第二个PO、第二PF的第三个PO、第三PF的第一个PO；
第一个PF的第三个PEI的指示信息跳跃指示：第一个PF的第三个PO、第二PF的第 一个PO、第三PF的第二个PO。
上面仅为非相同位置的一个详细解释，可以包括但不限于三个PF，也包括但不限于每个PF有三个PO。
在本实施例中，一个PEI的指示信息跳跃指示至少一个PF中每个PF预设映射位置的至少一个PO，节省了PEI的可用信号资源。例如，PEI以DCI-based PEI为例，2个PF，每个PF有4个PO，通过一个PEI连续指示2个PF，需要8个DCI bit。但是通过一个PEI跳跃指示2个PF的第一个PO，则2个PF仅需2个DCI bit，同样的，PEI以SSS-based PEI或TRS-based PEI进行多个PF的跳跃指示PO，同样能够节省序列资源。也就是说，通过一个PEI的指示信息跳跃指示至少一个PF中每个PF预设映射位置的PO，可节省DCI bit或参考信号序列，即PEI跳跃指示PO，可节省用于指示的信号资源。
为辅助理解技术方案，以具体PEI场景为例加以说明：
在一个PF仅有一个PEI的场景：
参照图5，SearcheSpaceId＝0，Ns＝1，N＝T/16，T＝32，则N＝32/16＝2，即DRX Cycle＝32个无线帧时，一个DRX Cycle(即DRX周期)内有N＝2个PF，每个PF有Ns＝1个PO。PF0的首个PO前PEI跳跃指示PF0和PF1的单个PO的监听状态。
参照图9，SearcheSpaceId＝0，Ns＝1，N＝T/16，T＝32，则N＝32/16＝2，即DRX Cycle＝32个无线帧时，一个DRX Cycle内有N＝2个PF，每个PF有Ns＝1个PO。PF0的首个PO前PEI跳跃指示PF0和PF1的单个PO对应的TRS是否可获得。
可选地，PEI跳跃指示至少一个PF中每个PF预设映射位置的至少一个PO的监听状态和TRS的获得状态，即如图5和图9的结合，PEI既指示PO的监听状态又指示TRS的获得状态。例如，参照图14，SearcheSpaceId＝0，Ns＝1，N＝T/16，T＝32，则N＝32/16＝2，即DRX Cycle＝32个无线帧时，一个DRX Cycle内有N＝2个PF，每个PF有Ns＝1个PO，PF0的首个PO前PEI跳跃指示PF0和PF1的单个PO的监听状态、又跳跃指示PF0和PF1的单个PO对应的TRS是否可获得。
可选地，所述监听状态可以包括以下至少一种：监听、无需监听或者部分监听且部分无需监听，和/或，所述获得状态可以包括以下至少一种：可获得、不可获得或者部分可获得且部分不可获得。
在一个PF包括多个PEI的场景：
参照图6，SearcheSpaceId＝1，Ns＝4，N＝T/8；T＝32；则N＝32/8＝4，即DRX Cycle＝32个无线帧时，一个DRX Cycle内有N＝4个PF，每个PF有Ns＝4个PO。PF0的PO0前PEI的指示信息跳跃指示PF0至PF3的PO0，PF0的PO1前PEI的指示信息跳跃指示PF0至PF3的PO1，PF0的PO2前PEI的指示信息跳跃指示PF0至PF3的PO2，PF0的PO3前PEI的指示信息跳跃指示PF0至PF3的PO3，PF0至PF3在同一个DRX周期，PF0至PF3也在同一分组。可选地，关于多个DRX周期的PF属于一个或多个分组，PEI的指示信息的跳跃指示逻辑基本相同，在此不做赘述。
可选地，发明人发现如果一个PEI连续指示多个PO，可能仅指示一个DRX周期的部分PF，在寻呼率很低的场景下，终端设备只知晓一个DRX周期内部分PF的至少一个PO的监听状态和/或是否通过TRS进行时频同步。只能对一个DRX周期的小部分PF的至少一个PO避免不必要唤醒次数和/或避免不必要唤醒时间，无法达到更好功耗降低的目的。在一实施例中，为解决此不足，在所述步骤S10之前，所述处理方法还包括：
S00，确定至少一个DRX周期内至少一个分组的PF。
在接收PEI之前，终端设备可先确定PF的分组状态，一个PEI可以指示一个分组中 多个PF的至少一个PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态，如一个PEI指示一个分组中多个PF的预设映射位置的PO，可以是一个DRX周期内的PF形成一个分组，或者，一个DRX周期内的PF形成多个分组，也可以是多个DRX周期内的PF形成一个分组。
由于一个PEI的指示信息跳跃指示一个分组中多个PF的非连续PO，每个PEI仅用来指示一个分组内每个PF的一个PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态，所以每个PEI可以指示整个或大部分DRX周期的PF，这样，在终端设备处于低寻呼率场景下，仅需要对分组中的第一个PF中Ns个PO做解析(每个PF对应Ns个PO)，便可以知道一个DRX周期或多个DRX周期中的PF中Ns个PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态，进而避免终端设备在无需监听的寻呼时机被唤醒，以使终端设备可以较长时间处于休眠状态，从而降低了功耗；和/或终端设备根据PEI获得PO对应的TRS的获得状态，使用TRS进行辅助时频同步，缩短唤醒的时间，进而节省了功耗。
为辅助理解技术方案，现以具体PEI场景为例加以说明：
在一个PF包括多个PEI，且一个DRX周期包括多个分组的场景下，参照图7，SearcheSpaceId＝0，Ns＝2，N＝T/4，T＝256，则N＝256/4＝64，即DRX Cycle＝256个无线帧时，一个DRX周期内有N＝64个PF，每个PF有Ns＝2个PO，则整个DRX周期内的PO分为两部分(即分组1和分组2)做PEI指示。
需要说明的是，在图7中，PEI的指示信息可指示分组1和分组2中各PF的TRS。如图10的例子，参照图10，SearcheSpaceId＝0，Ns＝2，N＝T/4，T＝256，则N＝256/4＝64，即DRX Cycle＝256个无线帧时，一个DRX Cycle内有N＝64个PF，每个PF有Ns＝2个PO，则整个DRX Cycle内的PO分为两部分(即分组1和分组2)做PEI指示。
针对图10的一实施例，若PEI是基于DCI-based的，且用于PEI指示的bit数为48，则按照一个PEI可以指示L＝32个PF的场景给出的。实施例设计图仅用来表示调度的流程，不表示调度的PF是并行调度，即PF0，PF1，.......,PF63是按时间顺序排列的。图10的分组方式和PEI跳跃指示TRS的指示方式也适用于图7、图8a和图8b，图7、图8a和图8b中PEI可同步指示PO对应的TRS的获得状态。为更直观体现图10分组方式和指示方式的适用，可在图10中增加PEI跳跃指示每组PF的至少一个PO的监听状态，请参照图15，PEI跳跃指示每个分组中每个PF对应位置的PO的监听状态和TRS的获得状态。
又如，参照图8a和图8b，SearcheSpaceId＝1，Ns＝4，N＝T/2，T＝256，则N＝256/2＝128，即DRX周期＝256个无线帧时，一个DRX Cycle内有N＝128个PF，每个PF有Ns＝4个PO，则整个DRX Cycle内的PO分为四部分(分组1、分组2、分组3和分组4)做PEI指示。
可选地，所述PEI位于同一分组中的首个PF中的对应PO之前，所述指示信息指示的至少一个PF存在于所述至少一个分组。在终端设备处于RRC idle或者RRC INACTIVE态，在终端设备监听寻呼消息过程中，
(1)若一个DRX周期仅有一个分组，则在一个DRX周期的第一个PF的Ns个PO监听之前各放置一个PEI，此PEI的指示信息分别指示整个DRX周期的每个PF的对应位置的PO是否需要监听和/或是否通过TRS进行辅助时频同步。如果不需要监听，则终端设备直接跳过无需监听的PO，保持休眠，仅在需要监听的寻呼时机被唤醒以进行PDCCH监听，和/或在PO需要监听且PEI指示的TRS可获得时，通过TRS进行辅助时频同步。
(2)若多个DRX周期属于同一分组，则在时序上第一个DRX周期的第一个PF的Ns个PO监听之前各放置一个PEI，此PEI的指示信息分别指示多个DRX周期的每个PF的对应位置的PO是否需要监听和/或是否通过TRS进行辅助时频同步。如果不需要监听，则终端设备直接跳过无需监听的PO，保持休眠，仅在需要监听的寻呼时机被唤醒以进行PDCCH监听，和/或PO需要监听且PEI指示的TRS可获得时，通过TRS进行辅助时频同步。
(3)若一个DRX周期包含多个分组，则在每个分组的首个PF的Ns个PO监听之前各放置一个PEI，此PEI的指示信息分别指示每个分组的每个PF的对应位置的PO是否需要监听和/或是否通过TRS进行辅助时频同步，如果不需要监听则终端设备直接跳过无需监听的PO，保持休眠，仅在需要监听的PO位置被唤醒以进行PDCCH监听，和/或PO需要监听且PEI指示的TRS可获得时，通过TRS进行辅助时频同步。
在又一实施例中，所述步骤S00包括：依据第一数目和/或第二数目，确定至少一个DRX周期内至少一个分组的PF。
所述第一数目为所述DRX周期内包含PF的个数，所述第二数目为承载所述PEI的指示信息的标识个数。依据第一数目和/或第二数目，确定至少一个DRX周期内至少一个分组的PF是DRX周期的哪些寻呼帧，如依据第一数目和第二数目，确定一个分组PF的个数L。
为方便理解，假设第一数目为N，第二数目为G，一个DRX周期的无线帧总数为T，基于表2的协议关系，可知N，一个分组PF的个数为L，L＝2 x<＝G。针对DRX周期内有多于L个PF的场景(即N>L)，可以每L个PF做一个分类指示以形成一个分组，仅指示整个DRX周期的L个PF的好处在于节省了DCI bit或参考信号序列，这样最多只需要L个DCI bit或参考信号序列就可以指示整个DRX周期。L的取值取决于最终用来承载PEI的DCI bit数或参考信号序列个数(即第二数目G)，例如，基于L＝2 x<＝G，DCI-based PEI有48bit(即G＝48)，则L取32；DCI-based PEI有12bit(即G＝12)，则L取8。
针对图7的实施例，是假设DCI-based PEI bit数为48，一个PEI指示L＝32个PF的场景给出的。实施例设计图仅用来表示调度的流程，不表示调度的PF是并行调度，即PF0，PF1，.......,PF63是按时间顺序排列的。
可选地，根据38.304、38.331协议总结了Paging相关参数的含义，见表1，根据高层信令的可能取值，对一个DRX周期内可能存在的PF数目总结见表2。
由表2可知，一个DRX周期内可能有过多的PF，为了节省DCI bit或参考信号序列，根据DRX周期内不同PF数目做了分类，目的是尽可能使用足够多的bit或参考信号序列指示DRX周期内的PF，以保证低寻呼率下终端设备可以更长时间的处于休眠状态，以减少功耗。
表1
Figure PCTCN2021110634-appb-000001
表2
Figure PCTCN2021110634-appb-000002
在一实施例中，所述步骤S30，包括以下至少一种：
指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得；
监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO；
监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得；
指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得；
不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO；
不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得；
监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO；
指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得和指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得；
监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得；
监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得；
监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得；
监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得；
不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得。
针对步骤S30，进一步细化说明如下：
在一可实现方式中，PEI的指示信息可以指示终端设备基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，即至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS的获得状态为可获得，终端设备可根据获得状态，基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，减少时频同步耗费时长，减少终端设备的功耗。
在一可实现方式中，PEI的指示信息可以指示终端设备监听至少一个分组内不同PF的 至少一个PO，即至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO的监听状态为监听，终端设备可根据监听状态，监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO，不监听监听状态为无需监听的PO，减少终端设备唤醒次数，减少终端设备的功耗。
在一可实现方式中，PEI的指示信息可以指示终端设备监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，即至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO的监听状态为监听且至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS的获得状态为可获得。终端设备可根据监听状态，监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO，减少终端设备唤醒次数，并且终端设备可根据获得状态，基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，减少时频同步耗费时长，减少终端设备的功耗。
在一可实现方式中，PEI的指示信息可以指示终端设备不基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，即至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS的获得状态为不可获得，终端设备不基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步。
在一可实现方式中，PEI的指示信息可以指示终端设备不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO，即至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO的监听状态为无需监听，终端设备不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO。
在一可实现方式中，PEI的指示信息可以指示终端设备不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且不基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，即至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO的监听状态为无需监听且至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS的获得状态为不可获得，终端设备不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且不基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步。
在一可实现方式中，PEI的指示信息可以指示终端设备监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO，即至少一个分组内不同PF的多个PO的监听状态为部分监听且部分无需监听，终端设备监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO。
在一可实现方式中，PEI的指示信息可以指示终端设备基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步和不基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，即至少一个分组内不同PF的多个TRS的获得状态为部分可获得且部分不可获得，终端设备基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步、同时不基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步。
在一可实现方式中，PEI的指示信息可以指示终端设备：监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，即至少一个分组内不同PF的多个PO的监听状态为部分监听且部分无需监听，至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS的获得状态为可获得，终端设备监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得。
在一可实现方式中，PEI的指示信息可以指示终端设备：监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且不基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，即至少一个分组内不同PF的多个PO的监听状态为部分监听且部分无需监听，至少一个分组内不同PF的多个TRS的获得状态为部分可获得且部分不可获得，终端设备监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至 少一个TRS可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得。
在一可实现方式中，PEI的指示信息可以指示终端设备：监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且不基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，即至少一个分组内不同PF的多个PO的监听状态为部分监听且部分无需监听，至少一个分组内不同PF的多个TRS的获得状态为部分可获得且部分不可获得，终端设备监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得。
在一可实现方式中，PEI的指示信息可以指示终端设备：监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且不基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且不基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，即至少一个分组内不同PF的多个PO的监听状态为部分监听且部分无需监听，至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS的获得状态为不可获得，终端设备监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得。
在一可实现方式中，PEI的指示信息可以指示终端设备：不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且不基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，即至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO的监听状态为无需监听，至少一个分组内不同PF的多个TRS的获得状态为部分可获得且部分不可获得，终端设备不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得。
在本实施例中，PEI的指示信息可跳跃指示：一个或多个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO进行监听、无需监听或者部分监听且部分无需监听，和/或，TRS可获得、TRS不可获得或者部分TRS可获得且部分不可获得，指示信息可以覆盖指示一个或多个PF中的PO监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态。PEI可位于同一分组中的首个PF中的每个PO之前，提供了PEI跳跃指示不同PF的至少一个PO的实现方式，节省了承载PEI的标识个数(如DCI bit或参考信号序列)，保证低寻呼率下终端设备可以更长时间处于休眠状态和/或可以更短时间进行PO解调，以降低功耗。
可选地，所述步骤S20包括：
S21，根据所述PEI，确定同一或不同DRX周期至少一个PF的至少一个PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态。
可选地，所述步骤S21包括以下至少一种：
若配置的DRX周期内的PF被配置为单一分组，则解析单一分组的首个PF中各PO前的PEI中指示信息，确定单一分组的每个PF对应位置的PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态；可选地，监听状态包括监听、无需监听或者部分监听且部分无需监听，所述获得状态可以为可获得、均不可获得或者部分可获得且部分不可获得。
若配置的DRX周期内的PF被配置为多个分组，则解析每个分组的首个PF中各PO前的PEI中指示信息，分别确定每个分组的每个PF对应位置的PO的监听状态和/或TRS的 获得状态。
可选地，所述步骤S21包括以下至少一种：
若配置的DRX周期内的PF被配置为单一分组，则解析单一分组的首个PF中各PO前的PEI中指示信息，确定单一分组的预定规则选定的非连续多个PF对应位置的PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态；
若配置的DRX周期内的PF被配置为多个分组，则解析每个分组的首个PF中各PO前的PEI中指示信息，分别确定每个分组的预定规则选定的非连续多个PF对应位置的PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态。
可选地，预定规则可为以分组中PF序号的奇偶数选定、等差数列选定等确定非连续多个PF，区别于分组中连续的每个PF，预定规则选定非连续多个PF适用于单一分组和多个分组的情形。
在预设规则一可行方式中，预设规则为奇偶数选定方式，即在一个分组中选定序号为奇数或偶数的PF，解析此分组中首个PF前各PO前的PEI，确定序号为奇数或偶数的非连续的多个PF对应位置的PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态。
在一可选实施例中，预设规则为选定序号为奇数的非连续多个PF，参照图16，一个分组包括6个PF，每个PF有2个PO，分组中PF分别是PF0、PF1、PF2、PF3、PF4、PF5，此分组首位的PF0中PO0和PO1前的PEI跳跃指示PF1、PF3和PF5中对应位置的PO的监听状态和TRS的获得状态。需要注意的是，此可选实施例中，仅为预设规则选定非连续多个PF的一个详细解释，可以包括但不限于6个PF，也包括但不限于每个PF有2个PO。
可选地，预设规则可为选定序号为偶数的非连续多个PF，例如一个分组包括12个PF，分组中首个PF的PEI跳跃指示PF2、PF4、PF6、PF8、PF10和PF12对应位置的PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态。
可选地，预设规则可选定序号为等差数列每项值得非连续多个PF，例如，一个分组包括12个PF，等差数列为首项为0、公差为3的数列，等差数列为0、3、6、9、12，因此分组中首个PF的PEI跳跃指示PF3、PF6、PF9和PF12对应位置的PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态。
可选地，所述接收PEI包括：接收至少一个DRX周期的至少一组PF中对应的PO的PEI。
终端设备接收PEI的过程具体为：
接收一个DRX周期的一组或多组PF中对应的PO的PEI，PF中对应的PO可以解释为PF中预设映射位置的PO；或者接收多个DRX周期所组成的一组PF中对应的PO的PEI；或者接收多个DRX周期的多组PF中对应的PO的PEI。所述PEI位于同一分组中的首个PF中的对应PO之前。
在一实施例中，所述步骤S30中，包括以下至少一种：
响应于所述PEI中的指示信息标识单元监听PO；
响应于所述PEI中的指示信息标识单元做TRS同步；
响应于所述PEI中的指示信息标识单元监听PO且做TRS同步；
响应于所述PEI中的指示信息标识单元不监听PO；
响应于所述PEI中的指示信息标识单元不做TRS同步；
响应于所述PEI中的指示信息标识单元不监听PO且不做TRS同步。
当PEI为DCI-based时，PEI中的多个bit位对应跳跃指示多个PF相同位置PO的监听状态，即若指示信息的标识单元(如一个bit位)为第一值(如1)，则此标识单元指示 的PO的监听状态为监听，监听此标识单元指示的PO的PDCCH和/或PDSCH；若指示信息的标识单元(如一个bit位)为第二值(如0)，则此标识单元指示的PO的监听状态为不监听，不监听此标识单元指示的PO的PDCCH和/或PDSCH。
例如，PEI为0101，即指示信息的标识单元依次为0101，依次跳跃指示PF0、PF1、PF2和PF3中相同位置的PO1，则不监听PF0的PO1的PDCCH和/或PDSCH、监听PF1的PO1的PDCCH和/或PDSCH、不监听PF2的PO1的PDCCH和/或PDSCH、监听PF3的PO1的PDCCH和/或PDSCH。
可选地，当PEI的指示信息为参考信号序列时，参考信号序列的标识单元(如子序列)为第一值，则监听此标识单元指示的PO的PDCCH和/或PDSCH，为第二值，则不监听此标识单元指示的PO的PDCCH和/或PDSCH。
基于基本相同的原理，当PEI的TRS相关指示信息为DCI多个bit位时，指示信息的多个bit位对应跳跃指示多个PF相同位置PO对应TRS的获得状态，即若指示信息的标识单元(如一个bit位)为第一值(如1)，则此标识单元指示的PO对应TRS的获得状态为可获得，确定此标识单元指示的PO对应的TRS应用于PO解调前的辅助时频同步；和/或，若指示信息的标识单元(如一个bit位)为第二值(如0)，则此标识单元指示的PO对应TRS的获得状态为不可获得，确定此标识单元指示的PO对应的TRS不应用于PO解调前的辅助时频同步。
例如，PEI为0101，即指示信息的标识单元依次为0101，依次跳跃指示PF0、PF1、PF2和PF3中相同位置的TRS，则PF0的PO1对应的TRS不可获得、PF1的PO1对应的TRS可获得、PF2的PO1对应的TRS不可获得、PF3的PO1对应的TRS可获得。
可选地，当PEI的TRS相关指示信息为参考信号序列时，参考信号序列的标识单元(如子序列)为第一值，则此标识单元指示的PO对应的TRS可获得且可应用于PO解调前的时频同步；和/或，参考信号序列的标识单元(如子序列)为第二值，则此标识单元指示的PO对应的TRS不可获得。
当PEI的标识单元既用于指示PO的监听状态又用于指示TRS的获得状态，则PEI指示信息解释如下(以DCI-based PEI为例，Sequence-based PEI有相同解析)：
例如，PEI为01010001，即PO监听状态指示信息(即PO指示)的标识单元依次为0101，TRS获得状态指示信息(即TRS获得性指示)的标识单位为0001，PEI依次跳跃指示PF0、PF1、PF2和PF3中相同位置的PO1，则不监听PF0的PO1且PF0的PO1对应TRS不可获得、监听PF1的PO1且PF1的PO1对应TRS不可获得、不监听PF2的PO1且PF2的PO1对应TRS不可获得、监听PF3的PO1且PF3的PO1对应TRS可获得且可应用于PO解调前的辅助时频同步。
当DRX周期包含的PF中仅包含一个PO即Ns＝1，且PF个数比较少，比如PF个数为2，4，8等，则仅需在第一个PF的至少一个PO前放置一个承载TRS获得性指示(即TRS获得状态相关指示信息)的PEI，进行指示整个DRX周期内的TRS的获得状态。
当每个PO对应的TRS的获得性指示是随机的，且DRX周期内每个PF包含至少一个PO，DRX周期内PF个数比较多，比如每个DRX cycle内有128个PF等，则需要根据PEI可以表示的bit，对整个DRX周期内的PF进行分组，且仅在每组的第一个PF内的每个PO前放置PEI，用来指示整个分组的TRS的获得状态。
本申请中的PEI既可以用来仅指示PO的监听状态，也可以用来仅指示PO对应的TRS的获得状态，还可以用来既指示PO的监听状态又可以同时指示PO对应的TRS的获得状态。参照图11a和图11b，给出PEI同时指示PO监听状态和TRS获得状态的技术方案，且实例以DCI-based为例，Sequence-based PEI的设计有相同技术方案。在一种技术方案实施例中，上述各实施例以及图5至图10的例子，给出了PEI仅指示PO监听状态或PEI仅指示 PO的TRS获得状态的示意图；事实上PEI还可以用来同时指示PO监听状态和TRS获得状态，如图14至图16的例子。
TRS获得性指示的目的是为了使终端设备提前获知TRS是否存在，在需要进行PO解调时，用于辅助SSB实现更好的下行同步，进而确保PO解调的成功率。基于此，本专利还提出可以按照PEI中PO是否需要监听决定TRS获得性指示是否需要指示。即若PEI中指示PO监听状态的bit为0，即无需监听PO，则TRS获得性指示也无需占用bit，可以预设保留位替代，如此可以进一步节省PEI指示bit。设计方案同样适用于SSS-based或TRS-based PEI。
参照图11a，假设PEI指示里面PO指示的bit：0表示无需监听此PO，1表示需要监听此PO；PEI中的TRS获得性指示：0bit表示TRS不可获得，1表示TRS可获得，reserved bit(保留位)表示目前bit暂时无需占用。针对图11b中，仅在PO需要监听时，PEI中给出的TRS获得性指示才具有有效性，且图11b的bit设计是一个PO指示对应一个TRS获得性指示，但仅在PO指示bit为1时，TRS获得性指示才需要进行获得性和不可获得性的解析。
为使UE在寻呼过程中，减少功耗，本申请还提供一种处理方法，应用于终端设备，在一实施例中，参照图12，包括以下步骤：
S100，若分组信息及指示信息满足预设条件，则根据所述分组信息和指示信息，确定至少一个分组的PF的至少一个PO的监听状态和/或TRS获得状态；
S200，根据所述监听状态确定是否监听寻呼消息，和/或，根据所述TRS的获得状态确定是否通过TRS进行时频同步。
在一实现方式中，终端设备在接收到PEI后,，可根据指示信息提前知晓当前以及后续至少一个PF中的PO的监听状态，在后续无需监听的寻呼时机继续保持睡眠，仅在后续需要监听的寻呼时机唤醒。终端设备针对性的被唤醒，避免了在每一个寻呼时机频繁唤醒且进行搜索空间检测，进而降低了终端功耗。
在另一实现方式中，终端设备在接收到PEI之后，可根据指示信息提前知晓当前以及后续至少一个PF中的PO对应的TRS的获得状态，在后续TRS可获得且需要进行PO监听时，通过TRS辅助SSB实现时频同步，缩短终端设备唤醒的时间，减少终端设备的功耗。
可选地，终端设备唤醒后，通过TRS进行辅助时频同步，可能仅需要解析一个SSB，若无TRS进行辅助时频同步，可能需要解析三个SSB。终端设备通过TRS进行辅助时频同步，可缩短PO解调时间，进而减少终端设备唤醒的时长，减少终端设备的功能。
在又一实现方式中，终端设备在接收到PEI之后，可根据指示信息提前知晓当前以及后续至少一个PF中的PO的监听状态，终端设备可在后续无需监听的寻呼时机继续保持睡眠，仅在后续需要监听的寻呼时机唤醒，从而避免在每一个PO频繁唤醒且进行搜索空间检测，通过减少唤醒次数降低终端设备的功耗。指示信息同时还可以预先指示至少一个PF中PO的TRS是否可以获得，特别用于预先指示至少一个PF中需要监听的寻呼时机的TRS是否可以获得，需要进行PO监听且TRS的获得状态为可获得的寻呼时机，直接通过TRS进行时频同步，缩短终端设备的唤醒的时间，通过减少唤醒时间，降低终端设备的功耗。
在本实施例中，接收PEI，并通过PEI中指示信息确定至少一个PF的至少一个PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态，再根据所述监听状态确定是否监听寻呼消息，和/或，根据所述TRS的获得状态确定是否通过TRS进行时频同步，在寻呼过程中，通过减少终端设备唤醒次数和/或减少终端设备唤醒的时间，降低终端设备的功耗，实现终端设备省电的目的。
本申请支持通过PEI实现TRS/CSI-RS的获得性指示(即PEI中TRS相关指示信息)，且支持一个PEI支持至少一个PO对应的TRS/CSI-RS的获得性指示，具体实现思路是：
若每个PO对应的TRS/CSI-RS的获得性指示不同时，一个PEI指示至少一个PF的对应位置的TRS/CSI-RS的获得状态，比在每个PF的每个PO前放置一个PEI指示TRS/CSI-RS的获得状态更节省信号资源；同时TRS/CSI-RS还可以用于辅助下行同步，缩短PO解调时长。PEI跳跃指示TRS的获得状态与PEI跳跃指示PO的监听状态的指示方式基本相同。
在以上实施例的基础上，发明人发现：一个PEI的指示信息可指示PF中连续至少一个PO，但是这种连续指示至少一个PO的方式比较占用PEI的可用资源，如PEI为DCI-based PEI(通过DCI bit映射的方式承载寻呼指示)，则PEI连续指示至少一个PO比较浪费DCI bit的占用资源，例如，参照图4，如果一个PF有12个PO，连续指示12个PF，就需要144bit，造成bit位的浪费；如PEI为SSS-based PEI(通过SSS(Secondary Synchronization Signa1，辅同步信号)参考信号映射的方式承载PEI)或TRS-based PEI，基于SSS序列或TRS序列，则需要144个序列来实现连续PO的指示，造成序列的浪费。
基于此问题，本申请进一步提出另一实施例，一个PEI的指示信息跳跃指示至少一个PF中每个PF预设映射位置的一个或至少一个PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态，预设映射位置可以是每个PF中相同位置(即PO在PF中的排序位置相同)，即所述指示信息用于指示至少一个PF同一位置的PO的监听状态，在一可选实施方式中，可以为以下至少一种：
第一个PF的第一个PEI的指示信息跳跃指示：第一个PF的第一个PO、第二个PF的第一个PO、第三个PF的第一个PO；
第一个PF的第二个PEI的指示信息跳跃指示：第一个PF的第二个PO、第二个PF的第二个PO、第三个PF的第二个PO；
第一个PF的第三个PEI的指示信息跳跃指示：第一个PF的第三个PO、第二个PF的第三个PO、第三个PF的第三个PO。
上面仅为相同位置的一个详细解释，可以包括但不限于三个PF，也包括但不限于每个PF有三个PO。
可选地，预设映射位置也可以是每个PF中非相同位置，只要PEI完成至少一个PF中所有PO的跳跃指示即可。如PEI的指示信息跳跃指示至少一个PF中排序位置逐个递增的位置处的PO直至遍历指示PF中所有PO，即所述指示信息用于指示至少一个PF不同位置的PO的监听状态，在一可选实施方式中，可以为以下至少一种：
第一个PF的第一个PEI的指示信息跳跃指示：第一个PF的第一个PO、第二PF的第二个PO、第三PF的第三个PO；
第一个PF的第二个PEI的指示信息跳跃指示：第一个PF的第二个PO、第二PF的第三个PO、第三PF的第一个PO；
第一个PF的第三个PEI的指示信息跳跃指示：第一个PF的第三个PO、第二PF的第一个PO、第三PF的第二个PO。
上面仅为非相同位置的一个详细解释，可以包括但不限于三个PF，也包括但不限于每个PF有三个PO。
在本实施例中，一个PEI的指示信息跳跃指示至少一个PF中每个PF预设映射位置的至少一个PO，节省了PEI的可用信号资源。例如，PEI以DCI-based PEI为例，2个PF，每个PF有4个PO，通过一个PEI连续指示2个PF，需要8个DCI bit。但是通过一个PEI跳跃指示2个PF的第一个PO，则2个PF仅需2个DCI bit，同样的，PEI以SSS-based PEI或TRS-based PEI进行多个PF的跳跃指示PO，同样能够节省序列资源。也就是说，通过 一个PEI的指示信息跳跃指示至少一个PF中每个PF预设映射位置的PO，可节省DCI bit或参考信号序列，即PEI跳跃指示PO，可节省用于指示的信号资源。
为辅助理解技术方案，现以具体PEI场景为例加以说明：
在一个PF仅有一个PEI的场景：
参照图5，SearcheSpaceId＝0，Ns＝1，N＝T/16，T＝32，则N＝32/16＝2，即DRX Cycle＝32个无线帧时，一个DRX Cycle(即DRX周期)内有N＝2个PF，每个PF有Ns＝1个PO。PF0的首个PO前PEI跳跃指示PF0和PF1的单个PO的监听状态。
参照图9，SearcheSpaceId＝0，Ns＝1，N＝T/16，T＝32，则N＝32/16＝2，即DRX Cycle＝32个无线帧时，一个DRX Cycle内有N＝2个PF，每个PF有Ns＝1个PO。PF0的首个PO前PEI跳跃指示PF0和PF1的单个PO对应的TRS是否可获得。
可选地，PEI跳跃指示至少一个PF中每个PF预设映射位置的至少一个PO的监听状态和TRS的获得状态，即如图5和图9的结合，PEI即指示PO的监听状态又指示TRS的获得状态。例如，参照图14，SearcheSpaceId＝0，Ns＝1，N＝T/16，T＝32，则N＝32/16＝2，即DRX Cycle＝32个无线帧时，一个DRX Cycle内有N＝2个PF，每个PF有Ns＝1个PO，PF0的首个PO前PEI跳跃指示PF0和PF1的单个PO的监听状态、又跳跃指示PF0和PF1的单个PO对应的TRS是否可获得。
可选地，所述监听状态可以包括以下至少一种：监听、无需监听或者部分监听且部分无需监听，和/或，所述获得状态可以包括以下至少一种：可获得、不可获得或者部分可获得且部分不可获得。
在一个PF包括多个PEI的场景：
参照图6，SearcheSpaceId＝1，Ns＝4，N＝T/8；T＝32；则N＝32/8＝4，即DRX Cycle＝32个无线帧时，一个DRX Cycle内有N＝4个PF，每个PF有Ns＝4个PO。PF0的PO0前PEI的指示信息跳跃指示PF0至PF3的PO0，PF0的PO1前PEI的指示信息跳跃指示PF0至PF3的PO1，PF0的PO2前PEI的指示信息跳跃指示PF0至PF3的PO2，PF0的PO3前PEI的指示信息跳跃指示PF0至PF3的PO3，PF0至PF3在同一个DRX周期，PF0至PF3也在同一分组。可选地，关于多个DRX周期的PF属于一个或多个分组，PEI的指示信息的跳跃指示逻辑基本相同，在此不做赘述。
可选地，发明人发现如果一个PEI连续指示多个PO，可能仅指示一个DRX周期的部分PF，在寻呼率很低的场景下，终端设备只知晓一个DRX周期内部分PF的至少一个PO的监听状态和/或是否通过TRS进行时频同步。只能对一个DRX周期的小部分PF的至少一个PO避免不必要唤醒次数和/或避免不必要唤醒时间，无法达到更好功耗降低的目的。在一实施例中，为解决此不足，所述分组信息的确定或生成方式，包括以下至少一种：
确定至少一个DRX周期内至少一个分组的PF；
根据第一数目和/或第二数目，生成至少一个DRX周期内至少一个分组的PF。
在接收PEI之前，终端设备可先确定PF的分组状态。一个PEI可以指示一个分组中多个PF的至少一个PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态，如一个PEI指示一个分组中多个PF的预设映射位置的PO，可以是一个DRX周期内的PF形成一个分组，或者，一个DRX周期内的PF形成多个分组，也可以是多个DRX周期内的PF形成一个分组。
由于一个PEI的指示信息跳跃指示一个分组中多个PF的非连续PO，每个PEI仅用来指示一个分组内每个PF的一个PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态，所以每个PEI可以指示整个或大部分DRX周期的PF，这样，在终端设备处于低寻呼率场景下，仅需要对分组中的第一个PF中Ns个PO做解析(每个PF对应Ns个PO)，便可以知道一个DRX周期或多 个DRX周期中的PF中Ns个PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态，进而避免终端设备在无需监听的寻呼时机被唤醒，以使终端设备可以较长时间处于休眠状态，从而降低了功耗；和/或终端设备根据PEI获得PO对应的TRS的获得状态，使用TRS进行辅助时频同步，缩短唤醒的时间，进而节省了功耗。
为辅助理解技术方案，现以具体PEI场景为例，在一个PF包括多个PEI，且一个DRX周期包括多个分组的场景下，参照图7，SearcheSpaceId＝0，Ns＝2，N＝T/4，T＝256，则N＝256/4＝64，即DRX周期＝256个无线帧时，一个DRX周期内有N＝64个PF，每个PF有Ns＝2个PO，则整个DRX周期内的PO分为两部分(即分组1和分组2)做PEI指示。
需要说明的是，在图7中，PEI的指示信息可指示分组1和分组2中各PF的TRS。如图10的例子，参照图10，SearcheSpaceId＝0，Ns＝2，N＝T/4，T＝256，则N＝256/4＝64，即DRX Cycle＝256个无线帧时，一个DRX Cycle内有N＝64个PF，每个PF有Ns＝2个PO，则整个DRX Cycle内的PO分为两部分(即分组1和分组2)做PEI指示。
针对图10的一实施例，若PEI是基于DCI-based的，且用于PEI指示的bit数为48，则按照一个PEI可以指示L＝32个PF的场景给出的。实施例设计图仅用来表示调度的流程，不表示调度的PF是并行调度，即PF0，PF1，.......,PF63是按时间顺序排列的。图10的分组方式和PEI跳跃指示TRS的指示方式也适用于图7、图8a和图8b，图7、图8a和图8b中PEI可同步指示PO对应的TRS的获得状态。为更直观体现图10分组方式和指示方式的适用，可在图10中增加PEI跳跃指示每组PF的至少一个PO的监听状态，请参照图15，PEI跳跃指示每个分组中每个PF对应位置的PO的监听状态和TRS的获得状态。
又如，参照图8a和图8b，SearcheSpaceId＝1，Ns＝4，N＝T/2，T＝256，则N＝256/2＝128，即DRX周期＝256个无线帧时，一个DRX Cycle内有N＝128个PF，每个PF有Ns＝4个PO，则整个DRX Cycle内的PO分为四部分(分组1、分组2、分组3和分组4)做PEI指示。
关于分组信息的生成方式：根据第一数目和/或第二数目，生成至少一个DRX周期内至少一个分组的PF。
所述第一数目为所述DRX周期内包含PF的个数，所述第二数目为承载所述PEI的指示信息的标识个数。依据第一数目和/或第二数目，确定至少一个DRX周期内至少一个分组的PF是DRX周期的哪些寻呼帧，如依据第一数目和第二数目，确定一个分组PF的个数L。
为方便理解，假设第一数目为N，第二数目为G，一个DRX周期的无线帧总数为T，基于表2的协议关系，可知N，一个分组PF的个数为L，L＝2 x<＝G。针对DRX周期内有多于L个PF的场景(即N>L)，可以每L个PF做一个分类指示以形成一个分组，仅指示整个DRX周期的L个PF的好处在于节省了DCI bit或参考信号序列，这样最多只需要L个DCI bit或参考信号序列就可以指示整个DRX周期。L的取值取决于最终用来承载PEI的DCI bit数或参考信号序列个数(即第二数目G)，例如，基于L＝2 x<＝G，DCI-based PEI有48bit(即G＝48)，则L取32；DCI-based PEI有12bit(即G＝12)，则L取8。
针对图7的实施例，是假设DCI-based PEI bit数为48，一个PEI指示L＝32个PF的场景给出的。实施例设计图仅用来表示调度的流程，不表示调度的PF是并行调度，即PF0，PF1，.......,PF63是按时间顺序排列的。
可选地，根据38.304、38.331协议总结了Paging相关参数的含义，见表3，根据高层信令的可能取值，对一个DRX周期内可能存在的PF数目总结见表4。
由表4可知，一个DRX周期内可能有过多的PF，为了节省DCI bit或参考信号序列，根据DRX周期内不同PF数目做了分类，目的是尽可能使用足够多的bit或参考信号序列指示DRX周期内的PF，以保证低寻呼率下终端设备可以更长时间的处于休眠状态，以减少功耗。
表3
Figure PCTCN2021110634-appb-000003
表4
Figure PCTCN2021110634-appb-000004
在一实施例中，所述满足预设条件，包括以下至少一种：
所述指示信息指示的至少一个PF存在于所述至少一个分组；
所述PEI位于同一分组中的首个PF中的对应PO之前，所述指示信息指示的至少一个PF存在于所述至少一个分组。在寻呼过程中，
(1)若一个DRX周期仅有一个分组，则在一个DRX周期的第一个PF的Ns个PO监听之前各放置一个PEI，此PEI的指示信息分别指示整个DRX周期的每个PF的对应位置的PO是否需要监听和/或对应的TRS/CSI-RS是否可获得。终端设备仅在需要监听的寻呼时机被唤醒并进行监听，和/或在需要进行PO监听且TRS可获得时，通过TRS进行辅助时频同步。
(2)若多个DRX周期属于同一分组，则在时序上第一个DRX周期的第一个PF的Ns个PO监听之前各放置一个PEI，此PEI的指示信息分别指示多个DRX周期的每个PF的对应位置的PO是否需要监听和/或对应的TRS是否可获得。终端设备仅在需要监听的寻呼时机被唤醒并进行监听，和/或在需要进行PO监听且TRS可获得时，通过TRS进行辅助时频同步。
(3)若一个DRX周期包含多个分组，则在每个分组的首个PF的Ns个PO监听之前各放置一个PEI，此PEI的指示信息分别指示每个分组的每个PF的对应位置的PO是否需要 监听和/或对应的TRS是否可获得。终端设备仅在需要监听的寻呼时机被唤醒并进行监听，和/或在需要进行PO监听且TRS可获得时通过TRS进行时频同步。
可选地，在步骤S100之前，所述处理方法还包括：接收PEI，具体为：接收至少一个DRX周期的至少一组PF中对应的PO的PEI。
终端设备接收PEI的过程具体为：
接收一个DRX周期的一组或多组PF中对应的PO的PEI，PF中对应的PO可以解释为PF中预设映射位置的PO；或者接收多个DRX周期所组成的一组PF中对应的PO的PEI；或者接收多个DRX周期的多组PF中对应的PO的PEI。所述PEI位于同一分组中的首个PF中的对应PO之前。
在一实施例中，所述步骤S200，包括以下至少一种：
指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得；
监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO；
监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得；
指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得；
不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO；
不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得；
监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO；
指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得和指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得；
监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得；
监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得；
监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得；
监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得；
不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得。
下面，对步骤S200，进一步细化说明：
在一可实现方式中，PEI的指示信息可以指示终端设备基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，即至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS的获得状态为可获得，终端设备可根据获得状态，基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，减少时频同步耗费时长，减少终端设备的功耗。
在一可实现方式中，PEI的指示信息可以指示终端设备监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO，即至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO的监听状态为监听，终端设备可根据监听状态，监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO，不监听监听状态为无需监听的PO，减少终端设备唤醒次数，减少终端设备的功耗。
在一可实现方式中，PEI的指示信息可以指示终端设备监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，即至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO的监听状态为监听且至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS的获得状态为可获得。终端设备可根据监听状态，监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO，减少终端设备唤醒次数，并且终端设备可根据获得状态，基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，减少时频同步耗费时长，减少终端设备的功耗。
在一可实现方式中，PEI的指示信息可以指示终端设备不基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，即至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS的获得状态为不可获得，终端设备不基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步。
在一可实现方式中，PEI的指示信息可以指示终端设备不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO，即至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO的监听状态为无需监听，终端设备不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO。
在一可实现方式中，PEI的指示信息可以指示终端设备不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且不基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，即至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO的监听状态为无需监听且至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS的获得状态为不可获得，终端设备不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且不基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步。
在一可实现方式中，PEI的指示信息可以指示终端设备监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO，即至少一个分组内不同PF的多个PO的监听状态为部分监听且部分无需监听，终端设备监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO。
在一可实现方式中，PEI的指示信息可以指示终端设备基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步和不基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，即至少一个分组内不同PF的多个TRS的获得状态为部分可获得且部分不可获得，终端设备基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步、同时不基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步。
在一可实现方式中，PEI的指示信息可以指示终端设备：监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，即至少一个分组内不同PF的多个PO的监听状态为部分监听且部分无需监听，至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS的获得状态为可获得，终端设备监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得。
在一可实现方式中，PEI的指示信息可以指示终端设备：监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且不基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，即至少一个分组内不同PF的多个PO的监听状态为部分监听且部分无需监听，至少一个分组内不同PF的多个TRS的获得状态为部分可获得且部分不可获得， 终端设备监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得。
在一可实现方式中，PEI的指示信息可以指示终端设备：监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且不基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，即至少一个分组内不同PF的多个PO的监听状态为部分监听且部分无需监听，至少一个分组内不同PF的多个TRS的获得状态为部分可获得且部分不可获得，终端设备监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得。
在一可实现方式中，PEI的指示信息可以指示终端设备：监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且不基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且不基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，即至少一个分组内不同PF的多个PO的监听状态为部分监听且部分无需监听，至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS的获得状态为不可获得，终端设备监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得。
在一可实现方式中，PEI的指示信息可以指示终端设备：不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且不基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，即至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO的监听状态为无需监听，至少一个分组内不同PF的多个TRS的获得状态为部分可获得且部分不可获得，终端设备不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得。
在本实施例中，PEI的指示信息可跳跃指示：一个或多个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO进行监听、无需监听或者部分监听且部分无需监听，和/或，TRS可获得、TRS不可获得或者部分TRS可获得且部分不可获得，指示信息可以覆盖指示一个或多个PF中的PO监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态。PEI可位于同一分组中的首个PF中的每个PO之前，提供了PEI跳跃指示不同PF的至少一个PO的实现方式，节省了承载PEI的标识个数(如DCI bit或参考信号序列)，保证低寻呼率下终端设备可以更长时间处于休眠状态和/或可以更短时间进行PO解调，以降低功耗。
可选地，所述步骤S100包括：
S101，根据所述分组信息，确定至少一个DRX周期内至少一个分组的PF；
S102，根据所述指示信息，确定同一或不同DRX周期处于至少一个分组的至少一个PF的至少一个PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态。
可选地，所述步骤S102包括以下至少一种：
若配置的DRX周期内的PF被配置为单一分组，则解析单一分组的首个PF中各PO前的PEI中指示信息，确定单一分组的每个PF对应位置的PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态；可选地，监听状态可以包括以下至少一种：监听、无需监听或者部分监听且部分无需监听，和/或，所述获得状态可以包括以下至少一种：可获得、均不可获得或者部分可 获得且部分不可获得。
若配置的DRX周期内的PF被配置为多个分组，则解析每个分组的首个PF中各PO前的PEI中指示信息，分别确定每个分组的每个PF对应位置的PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态。
可选地，所述步骤S102包括以下至少一种：
若配置的DRX周期内的PF被配置为单一分组，则解析单一分组的首个PF中各PO前的PEI中指示信息，确定单一分组的预定规则选定的非连续多个PF对应位置的PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态；
若配置的DRX周期内的PF被配置为多个分组，则解析每个分组的首个PF中各PO前的PEI中指示信息，分别确定每个分组的预定规则选定的非连续多个PF对应位置的PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态。
可选地，预定规则可为以分组中PF序号的奇偶数选定、等差数列选定等确定非连续多个PF，区别于分组中连续的每个PF，预定规则选定非连续多个PF适用于单一分组和多个分组的情形。
在预设规则一可行方式中，预设规则为奇偶数选定方式，即在一个分组中选定序号为奇数或偶数的PF，解析此分组中首个PF前各PO前的PEI，确定序号为奇数或偶数的非连续的多个PF对应位置的PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态。
在一可选实施例中，预设规则为选定序号为奇数的非连续多个PF，参照图16，一个分组包括6个PF，每个PF有2个PO，分组中PF分别是PF0、PF1、PF2、PF3、PF4、PF5，此分组首位的PF0中PO0和PO1前的PEI跳跃指示PF1、PF3和PF5中对应位置的PO的监听状态和TRS的获得状态。需要注意的是，此可选实施例中，仅为预设规则选定非连续多个PF的一个详细解释，可以包括但不限于6个PF，也包括但不限于每个PF有2个PO。
可选地，预设规则可为选定序号为偶数的非连续多个PF，例如一个分组包括12个PF，分组中首个PF的PEI跳跃指示PF2、PF4、PF6、PF8、PF10和PF12对应位置的PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态。
可选地，预设规则可选定序号为等差数列每项值得非连续多个PF，例如，一个分组包括12个PF，等差数列为首项为0、公差为3的数列，等差数列为0、3、6、9、12，因此分组中首个PF的PEI跳跃指示PF3、PF6、PF9和PF12对应位置的PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态。
在一实施例中，所述步骤S200，包括以下至少一种：
响应于所述指示信息标识单元监听PO；
响应于所述指示信息标识单元做TRS同步；
响应于所述指示信息标识单元监听PO且做TRS同步；
响应于所述指示信息标识单元不监听PO；
响应于所述指示信息标识单元不做TRS同步；
响应于所述指示信息标识单元不监听PO且不做TRS同步。
当PEI为DCI-based时，PEI中的多个bit位对应跳跃指示多个PF相同位置PO的监听状态，即若指示信息的标识单元(如一个bit位)为第一值(如1)，则此标识单元指示的PO的监听状态为监听，监听此标识单元指示的PO的PDCCH和/或PDSCH；和/或，若指示信息的标识单元(如一个bit位)为第二值(如0)，则此标识单元指示的PO的监听状态为不监听，不监听此标识单元指示的PO的PDCCH和/或PDSCH。
例如，PEI为0101，即指示信息的标识单元依次为0101，依次跳跃指示PF0、PF1、 PF2和PF3中相同位置的PO1，则不监听PF0的PO1的PDCCH和/或PDSCH、监听PF1的PO1的PDCCH和/或PDSCH、不监听PF2的PO1的PDCCH和/或PDSCH、监听PF3的PO1的PDCCH和/或PDSCH。
可选地，当PEI的指示信息为参考信号序列时，参考信号序列的标识单元(如子序列)为第一值，则监听此标识单元指示的PO的PDCCH和/或PDSCH，和/或，参考信号序列的标识单元(如子序列)为第二值，则不监听此标识单元指示的PO的PDCCH和/或PDSCH。
基于基本相同的原理，当PEI的TRS相关指示信息为DCI多个bit位时，指示信息的多个bit位对应跳跃指示多个PF相同位置PO对应TRS的获得状态，即若指示信息的标识单元(如一个bit位)为第一值(如1)，则此标识单元指示的PO对应TRS的获得状态为可获得，确定此标识单元指示的PO对应的TRS应用于PO解调前的辅助时频同步；和/或，若指示信息的标识单元(如一个bit位)为第二值(如0)，则此标识单元指示的PO对应TRS的获得状态为不可获得，确定此标识单元指示的PO对应的TRS不应用于PO解调前的辅助时频同步。
例如，PEI为0101，即指示信息的标识单元依次为0101，依次跳跃指示PF0、PF1、PF2和PF3中相同位置的TRS，则PF0的PO1对应的TRS不可获得、PF1的PO1对应的TRS可获得、PF2的PO1对应的TRS不可获得、PF3的PO1对应的TRS可获得。
可选地，当PEI的TRS相关指示信息为参考信号序列时，参考信号序列的标识单元(如子序列)为第一值，则此标识单元指示的PO对应的TRS可获得且可应用于PO解调前的时频同步；参考信号序列的标识单元(如子序列)为第二值，则此标识单元指示的PO对应的TRS不可获得。
当PEI的标识单元既用于指示PO的监听状态又用于指示TRS的获得状态，则PEI指示信息解释如下：(以DCI-based PEI为例，Sequence-based PEI有相同解析)
例如，PEI为01010001，即PO监听状态指示信息(即PO指示)的标识单元依次为0101，TRS获得状态指示信息(即TRS获得性指示)的标识单位为0001，PEI依次跳跃指示PF0、PF1、PF2和PF3中相同位置的PO1，则不监听PF0的PO1且PF0的PO1对应TRS不可获得、监听PF1的PO1且PF1的PO1对应TRS不可获得、不监听PF2的PO1且PF2的PO1对应TRS不可获得、监听PF3的PO1且PF3的PO1对应TRS可获得且可应用于PO解调前的辅助时频同步。
当DRX周期包含的PF中仅包含一个PO即Ns＝1，且PF个数比较少，比如PF个数为2，4，8等，则仅需在第一个PF的至少一个PO前放置一个承载TRS获得性指示(即TRS获得状态相关指示信息)的PEI，进行指示整个DRX周期内的TRS的获得状态。
当每个PO对应的TRS的获得性指示是随机的，且DRX周期内每个PF包含至少一个PO，DRX周期内PF个数比较多，比如每个DRX cycle内有128个PF等，则需要根据PEI可以表示的bit，对整个DRX周期内的PF进行分组，且仅在每组的第一个PF内的每个PO前放置PEI，用来指示整个分组的TRS的获得状态。
本申请中的PEI既可以用来仅指示PO的监听状态，也可以用来仅指示PO对应的TRS的获得状态，还可以用来既指示PO的监听状态又可以同时指示PO对应的TRS的获得状态。参照图11a和图11b，给出PEI同时指示PO监听状态和TRS获得状态的技术方案，且实例以DCI-based为例，Sequence-based PEI的设计有相同技术方案。在一种技术方案实施例中，上述各实施例以及图5至图10的例子，给出了PEI仅指示PO监听状态或PEI仅指示PO的TRS获得状态的示意图，事实上PEI还可以用来同时指示PO监听状态和TRS获得状态，如图14至图16的例子。
TRS获得性指示的目的是为了使终端设备提前获知TRS是否存在，在需要进行PO解调时，用于辅助SSB实现更好的下行同步，进而确保PO解调的成功率。基于此，本专利还 提出可以按照PEI中PO是否需要监听决定TRS获得性指示是否需要指示。即若PEI中指示PO监听状态的bit为0，即无需监听PO，则TRS获得性指示也无需占用bit，可以预设保留位替代，如此可以进一步节省PEI指示bit。设计方案同样适用于SSS-based或TRS-based PEI。
参照图11a，假设PEI指示里面PO指示的bit：0表示无需监听此PO，1表示需要监听此PO；PEI中的TRS获得性指示：0bit表示TRS不可获得，1表示TRS可获得，reserved bit(保留位)表示目前bit暂时无需占用。针对图11b中，仅在PO需要监听时，PEI中给出的TRS获得性指示才具有有效性，且图11b的bit设计是一个PO指示对应一个TRS获得性指示，但仅在PO指示bit为1时，TRS获得性指示才需要进行获得性和不可获得性的解析。
为使UE在接收寻呼消息过程中，减少功耗，本申请还提供一种处理方法，应用于网络设备，参照图13，所述方法包括以下步骤：
A10，向终端设备发送PEI，以使所述终端设备根据所述PEI中的指示信息确定至少一个PF的至少一个PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态；
所述监听状态用于指示确定是否监听寻呼消息，和/或，所述获得状态用于指示确定TRS是否可获得。
可选地，网络设备向终端设备发送PEI；所述PEI用于确定至少一个PF的至少一个PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态；
所述监听状态用于指示终端设备确定是否监听寻呼消息，和/或，所述获得状态用于指示TRS是否可获得。
可选地，网络设备向终端设备发送PEI，所述PEI中包括指示信息，所述PEI的指示信息用于确定确定至少一个PF的至少一个PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态；所述监听状态用于指示终端设备确定是否监听寻呼消息，和/或，所述获得状态用于指示终端设备确定TRS是否可获得。
在一实现方式中，指示信息可以用于指示当前时刻以及当前时刻之后的至少一个PF中的PO的监听状态，即指示信息可以预先指示至少一个PF中的PO是否需要监听，终端设备在接收到PEI之后，可根据指示信息提前知晓后续至少一个PF中的PO的监听状态，终端设备可在后续监听状态为不监听的寻呼时机继续保持休眠，仅在后续需要进行监听的寻呼时机唤醒，因此终端设备可以根据PEI中的指示信息，依据PO的监听状态，针对性的被唤醒，从而避免在每一个寻呼时机频繁唤醒进行搜索空间检测，进而实现终端设备功耗节省。
在另一实现方式中，指示信息也可以用于指示当前时刻以及当前时刻之后的至少一个PF中的PO对应的TRS的获得状态，即指示信息可以预先指示至少一个PF中PO的TRS是否可以获得，终端设备在接收到PEI之后，根据指示信息提前知晓后续至少一个PF中的PO对应的TRS的获得状态，可在后续TRS为可以获得且需要进行PO监听时，通过TRS进行辅助时频同步，快速实现下行同步，完成PO解调。如此便可以减少终端设备用于下行同步的SSB个数，缩短终端设备的同步时长，减少终端设备的功耗。
可选地，终端设备如果有TRS进行辅助时频同步，可能仅需要解析一个SSB，而如果没有TRS进行辅助时频同步，可能需要解析三个SSB，减少用于下行同步的SSB个数，可缩短下行同步时长，进而减少终端设备唤醒的时间。
在又一实现方式中，指示信息可以指示前时刻以及当前时刻之后的至少一个PF中的PO的监听状态和对应的TRS的获得状态，即指示信息可以预先指示至少一个PF中的PO是 否需要监听且对应的TRS是否可以获得，终端设备在接收到PEI之后，可根据指示信息提前知晓后续至少一个PF中的PO的监听状态，终端设备可在后续无需监听的寻呼时机继续保持休眠，仅在后续需要进行监听的寻呼时机唤醒，从而避免在每一个寻呼时机频繁唤醒及进行搜索空间检测，增加寻呼时机的休眠时长，减少了终端设备的功耗。指示信息还可以预先指示至少一个PF中PO对应的TRS是否可以获得，特别用于预先指示至少一个PF需要监听的PO的对应的TRS是否可以获得。在需要监听且TRS为可获得的寻呼时机，终端设备可以选择通过TRS进行辅助时频同步，缩短终端设备进行PO解调的时长，进而实现终端设备省功耗。
本申请支持通过PEI实现TRS/CSI-RS的获得性指示(即PEI中TRS相关指示信息)，且支持一个PEI支持至少一个PO对应的TRS/CSI-RS的获得性指示，具体实现思路如下：
若每个PO对应的TRS/CSI-RS的获得性指示不同时，一个PEI指示至少一个PF的对应位置的TRS/CSI-RS的获得状态，比在每个PF的每个PO前放置一个PEI指示TRS/CSI-RS的获得状态更节省信号资源；同时TRS/CSI-RS还可以用于辅助下行同步，缩短PO解调时长。PEI跳跃指示TRS的获得状态与PEI跳跃指示PO的监听状态的指示方式基本相同。
在以上实施例的基础上，发明人发现：一个PEI的指示信息可指示PF中连续至少一个PO，但是这种连续指示至少一个PO的方式比较占用PEI的可用资源，如PEI为DCI-based PEI(通过DCI bit映射的方式承载寻呼指示)，则PEI连续指示至少一个PO比较浪费DCI bit的占用资源，例如，参照图4，如果一个PF有12个PO，连续指示12个PF，就需要144bit，造成bit位的浪费；如PEI为SSS-based PEI(通过SSS(Secondary Synchronization Signa1，辅同步信号)参考信号映射的方式承载PEI)或TRS-based PEI，基于SSS序列或TRS序列，则需要144个序列来实现连续PO的指示，造成序列的浪费。
基于此问题，本申请进一步提出另一实施例，一个PEI的指示信息跳跃指示至少一个PF中每个PF预设映射位置的至少一个PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态，预设映射位置可以是每个PF中相同位置(即PO在PF中的排序位置相同)，即所述指示信息用于指示至少一个PF同一位置的PO的监听状态，在一可选实施方式中，可以为以下至少一种：
第一个PF的第一个PEI的指示信息跳跃指示：第一个PF的第一个PO、第二个PF的第一个PO、第三个PF的第一个PO；
第一个PF的第二个PEI的指示信息跳跃指示：第一个PF的第二个PO、第二个PF的第二个PO、第三个PF的第二个PO；
第一个PF的第三个PEI的指示信息跳跃指示：第一个PF的第三个PO、第二个PF的第三个PO、第三个PF的第三个PO。
上面仅为相同位置的一个详细解释，可以包括但不限于三个PF，也包括但不限于每个PF有三个PO。
可选地，预设映射位置也可以是每个PF中非相同位置，只要PEI完成至少一个PF中所有PO的跳跃指示即可。如PEI的指示信息跳跃指示至少一个PF中排序位置逐个递增的位置处的PO直至遍历指示PF中所有PO，即所述指示信息用于指示至少一个PF不同位置的PO的监听状态，在一可选实施方式中，可以为以下至少一种：
第一个PF的第一个PEI的指示信息跳跃指示：第一个PF的第一个PO、第二PF的第二个PO、第三PF的第三个PO；
第一个PF的第二个PEI的指示信息跳跃指示：第一个PF的第二个PO、第二PF的第三个PO、第三PF的第一个PO；
第一个PF的第三个PEI的指示信息跳跃指示：第一个PF的第三个PO、第二PF的第一个PO、第三PF的第二个PO。
上面仅为非相同位置的一个详细解释，可以包括但不限于三个PF，也包括但不限于每 个PF有三个PO。
在本实施例中，一个PEI的指示信息跳跃指示至少一个PF中每个PF预设映射位置的至少一个PO，节省了PEI的可用资源。例如，PEI以DCI-based PEI为例，2个PF，每个PF有4个PO，通过一个PEI连续指示2个PF，需要8个DCI bit。但是通过一个PEI跳跃指示2个PF的第一个PO，则2个PF仅需2个DCI bit，同样的，PEI以SSS-based PEI或TRS-based PEI进行多个PF的跳跃指示PO，同样能够节省序列资源。也就是说，通过一个PEI的指示信息跳跃指示至少一个PF中每个PF预设映射位置的PO，可节省DCI bit或参考信号序列，即PEI跳跃指示PO，可节省用于指示的信号资源。
为辅助理解技术方案，现以具体PEI场景为例：
在一个PF仅有一个PEI的场景：
参照图5，SearcheSpaceId＝0，Ns＝1，N＝T/16，T＝32，则N＝32/16＝2，即DRX Cycle＝32个无线帧时，一个DRX Cycle(即DRX周期)内有N＝2个PF，每个PF有Ns＝1个PO。PF0的首个PO前PEI跳跃指示PF0和PF1的单个PO的监听状态。
参照图9，SearcheSpaceId＝0，Ns＝1，N＝T/16，T＝32，则N＝32/16＝2，即DRX Cycle＝32个无线帧时，一个DRX Cycle内有N＝2个PF，每个PF有Ns＝1个PO。PF0的首个PO前PEI跳跃指示PF0和PF1的单个PO对应的TRS是否可获得。
可选地，PEI跳跃指示至少一个PF中每个PF预设映射位置的至少一个PO的监听状态和TRS的获得状态，即如图5和图9的结合，PEI既指示PO的监听状态又指示TRS的获得状态。例如，参照图14，SearcheSpaceId＝0，Ns＝1，N＝T/16，T＝32，则N＝32/16＝2，即DRX Cycle＝32个无线帧时，一个DRX Cycle内有N＝2个PF，每个PF有Ns＝1个PO，PF0的首个PO前PEI跳跃指示PF0和PF1的单个PO的监听状态、又跳跃指示PF0和PF1的单个PO对应的TRS是否可获得。
可选地，所述监听状态可以包括以下至少一种：监听、无需监听或者部分监听且部分无需监听，所述获得状态可以包括以下至少一种：可获得、不可获得或者部分可获得且部分不可获得。
在一个PF包括多个PEI的场景：
参照图6，SearcheSpaceId＝1，Ns＝4，N＝T/8；T＝32；则N＝32/8＝4，即DRX Cycle＝32个无线帧时，一个DRX Cycle内有N＝4个PF，每个PF有Ns＝4个PO。PF0的PO0前PEI的指示信息跳跃指示PF0至PF3的PO0，PF0的PO1前PEI的指示信息跳跃指示PF0至PF3的PO1，PF0的PO2前PEI的指示信息跳跃指示PF0至PF3的PO2，PF0的PO3前PEI的指示信息跳跃指示PF0至PF3的PO3，PF0至PF3在同一个DRX周期，PF0至PF3也在同一分组。可选地，关于多个DRX周期的PF属于一个或多个分组，PEI的指示信息的跳跃指示逻辑基本相同，在此不做赘述。
可选地，发明人发现如果一个PEI连续指示多个PO，可能仅指示一个DRX周期的部分PF，在寻呼率很低的场景下，终端设备只知晓一个DRX周期内部分PF的至少一个PO的监听状态和/或是否通过TRS进行时频同步。只能对一个DRX周期的小部分PF的至少一个PO避免不必要唤醒次数和/或避免不必要唤醒时间，无法达到更好功耗降低的目的。在一实施例中，为解决此不足，在所述步骤A10之前还包括：
A00，确定至少一个DRX周期的分组状态。
在网络设备向终端设备发送PEI之前，网络设备可先配置PF的分组状态，一个PEI可以指示一个分组中多个PF的至少一个PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态，如一个PEI指示一个分组中多个PF的预设映射位置的PO，可以是一个DRX周期内的PF形成一个分组， 或者，一个DRX周期内的PF形成多个分组，也可以是多个DRX周期内的PF形成一个分组。
由于一个PEI的指示信息跳跃指示一个分组中多个PF的非连续PO，每个PEI仅用来指示一个分组内每个PF的一个PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态，所以每个PEI可以指示整个或大部分DRX周期的PF，这样，在终端设备处于低寻呼率场景下，仅需要对分组中的第一个PF中Ns个PO做解析(每个PF对应Ns个PO)，便可以知道一个DRX周期或多个DRX周期中的PF中Ns个PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态，进而避免终端设备在无需监听的寻呼时机被唤醒，以使终端设备可以较长时间处于休眠状态，从而降低了功耗；和/或终端设备根据PEI获得PO对应的TRS的获得状态，使用TRS进行辅助时频同步，缩短唤醒的时间，进而节省了功耗。
为辅助理解技术方案，现以具体PEI场景为例进行说明：
在一个PF包括多个PEI，且一个DRX周期包括多个分组的场景下，参照图7，SearcheSpaceId＝0，Ns＝2，N＝T/4，T＝256，则N＝256/4＝64，即DRX Cycle＝256个无线帧时，一个DRX周期内有N＝64个PF，每个PF有Ns＝2个PO，则整个DRX周期内的PO分为两部分(即分组1和分组2)做PEI指示。
需要说明的是，在图7中，PEI的指示信息可指示分组1和分组2中各PF的TRS。如图10的例子，参照图10，SearcheSpaceId＝0，Ns＝2，N＝T/4，T＝256，则N＝256/4＝64，即DRX Cycle＝256个无线帧时，一个DRX Cycle内有N＝64个PF，每个PF有Ns＝2个PO，则整个DRX Cycle内的PO分为两部分(即分组1和分组2)做PEI指示。
针对图10的一实施例，若PEI是基于DCI-based的，且用于PEI指示的bit数为48，则按照一个PEI可以指示L＝32个PF的场景给出的。实施例设计图仅用来表示调度的流程，不表示调度的PF是并行调度，即PF0，PF1，.......,PF63是按时间顺序排列的。图10的分组方式和PEI跳跃指示TRS的指示方式也适用于图7、图8a和图8b，图7、图8a和图8b中PEI可同步指示PO对应的TRS的获得状态。为更直观体现图10分组方式和指示方式的适用，可在图10中增加PEI跳跃指示每组PF的至少一个PO的监听状态，请参照图15，PEI跳跃指示每个分组中每个PF对应位置的PO的监听状态和TRS的获得状态。
又如，参照图8a和图8b，SearcheSpaceId＝1，Ns＝4，N＝T/2，T＝256，则N＝256/2＝128，即DRX周期＝256个无线帧时，一个DRX Cycle内有N＝128个PF，每个PF有Ns＝4个PO，则整个DRX Cycle内的PO分为四部分(分组1、分组2、分组3和分组4)做PEI指示。
可选地，所述PEI位于同一分组中的首个PF中的对应PO之前，所述指示信息指示的至少一个PF存在于所述至少一个分组。在终端设备处于RRC idle或者RRC INACTIVE态，在终端设备监听寻呼消息过程中，网络设备可先配置PF的分组状态可包括以下几种：
(1)若一个DRX周期仅有一个分组，则在一个DRX周期的第一个PF的Ns个PO监听之前各放置一个PEI，此PEI的指示信息分别指示整个DRX周期的每个PF的对应位置的PO是否需要监听和/或是否通过TRS进行辅助时频同步。如果不需要监听，则终端设备直接跳过无需监听的PO，保持休眠，仅在需要监听的寻呼时机被唤醒以进行PDCCH监听，和/或在PO需要监听且PEI指示的TRS可获得时，通过TRS进行辅助时频同步。
(2)若多个DRX周期属于同一分组，则在时序上第一个DRX周期的第一个PF的Ns个PO监听之前各放置一个PEI，此PEI的指示信息分别指示多个DRX周期的每个PF的对应位置的PO是否需要监听和/或是否通过TRS进行辅助时频同步。如果不需要监听，则终端设备直接跳过无需监听的PO，保持休眠，仅在需要监听的寻呼时机被唤醒以进行PDCCH监听，和/或PO需要监听且PEI指示的TRS可获得时，通过TRS进行辅助时频同步。
(3)若一个DRX周期包含多个分组，则在每个分组的首个PF的Ns个PO监听之前各放置一个PEI，此PEI的指示信息分别指示每个分组的每个PF的对应位置的PO是否需要 监听和/或是否通过TRS进行辅助时频同步，如果不需要监听则终端设备直接跳过无需监听的PO，保持休眠，仅在需要监听的PO位置被唤醒以进行PDCCH监听，和/或PO需要监听且PEI指示的TRS可获得时，通过TRS进行辅助时频同步。
在又一实施例中，所述步骤A00包括：
依据第一数目和/或第二数目，确定至少一个DRX周期内至少一个分组的PF。
所述第一数目为所述DRX周期内包含PF的个数，所述第二数目为承载所述PEI的指示信息的标识个数。依据第一数目和/或第二数目，确定至少一个DRX周期内至少一个分组的PF是DRX周期的哪些寻呼帧，如依据第一数目和第二数目，确定一个分组PF的个数L。
为方便理解，假设第一数目为N，第二数目为G，一个DRX周期的无线帧总数为T，基于表2的协议关系，可知N，一个分组PF的个数为L，L＝2 x<＝G。针对DRX周期内有多于L个PF的场景(即N>L)，可以每L个PF做一个分类指示以形成一个分组，仅指示整个DRX周期的L个PF的好处在于节省了DCI bit或参考信号序列，这样最多只需要L个DCI bit或参考信号序列就可以指示整个DRX周期。L的取值取决于最终用来承载PEI的DCI bit数或参考信号序列个数(即第二数目G)，例如，基于L＝2 x<＝G，DCI-based PEI有48bit(即G＝48)，则L取32；DCI-based PEI有12bit(即G＝12)，则L取8。
针对图7的实施例，是假设DCI-based PEI bit数为48，一个PEI指示L＝32个PF的场景给出的。实施例设计图仅用来表示调度的流程，不表示调度的PF是并行调度，即PF0，PF1，.......,PF63是按时间顺序排列的。
可选地，根据38.304、38.331协议总结了Paging相关参数的含义，见表5，根据高层信令的可能取值，对一个DRX周期内可能存在的PF数目总结见表6。
由表6可知，一个DRX周期内可能有过多的PF，为了节省DCI bit或参考信号序列，根据DRX周期内不同PF数目做了分类，目的是尽可能使用足够多的bit或参考信号序列指示DRX周期内的PF，以保证低寻呼率下终端设备可以更长时间的处于休眠状态，以减少功耗。
表5
Figure PCTCN2021110634-appb-000005
表6
Figure PCTCN2021110634-appb-000006
在一实施例中，所述指示信息用于指示以下至少一种情形：
指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得；
监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO；
监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得；
指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得；
不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO；
不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得；
监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO；
指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得和指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得；
监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得；
监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得；
监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得；
监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得；
不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得。
以下，针对所述指示信息指示情形进一步细化说明：
在一可实现方式中，PEI的指示信息可以指示终端设备基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，即至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS的获得状态 为可获得，终端设备可根据获得状态，基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，减少时频同步耗费时长，减少终端设备的功耗。
在一可实现方式中，PEI的指示信息可以指示终端设备监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO，即至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO的监听状态为监听，终端设备可根据监听状态，监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO，不监听监听状态为无需监听的PO，减少终端设备唤醒次数，减少终端设备的功耗。
在一可实现方式中，PEI的指示信息可以指示终端设备监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，即至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO的监听状态为监听且至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS的获得状态为可获得。终端设备可根据监听状态，监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO，减少终端设备唤醒次数，并且终端设备可根据获得状态，基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，减少时频同步耗费时长，减少终端设备的功耗。
在一可实现方式中，PEI的指示信息可以指示终端设备不基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，即至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS的获得状态为不可获得，终端设备不基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步。
在一可实现方式中，PEI的指示信息可以指示终端设备不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO，即至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO的监听状态为无需监听，终端设备不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO。
在一可实现方式中，PEI的指示信息可以指示终端设备不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且不基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，即至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO的监听状态为无需监听且至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS的获得状态为不可获得，终端设备不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且不基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步。
在一可实现方式中，PEI的指示信息可以指示终端设备监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO，即至少一个分组内不同PF的多个PO的监听状态为部分监听且部分无需监听，终端设备监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO。
在一可实现方式中，PEI的指示信息可以指示终端设备基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步和不基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，即至少一个分组内不同PF的多个TRS的获得状态为部分可获得且部分不可获得，终端设备基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步、同时不基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步。
在一可实现方式中，PEI的指示信息可以指示终端设备：监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，即至少一个分组内不同PF的多个PO的监听状态为部分监听且部分无需监听，至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS的获得状态为可获得，终端设备监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得。
在一可实现方式中，PEI的指示信息可以指示终端设备：监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且不基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS 进行辅助时频同步，即至少一个分组内不同PF的多个PO的监听状态为部分监听且部分无需监听，至少一个分组内不同PF的多个TRS的获得状态为部分可获得且部分不可获得，终端设备监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得。
在一可实现方式中，PEI的指示信息可以指示终端设备：监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且不基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，即至少一个分组内不同PF的多个PO的监听状态为部分监听且部分无需监听，至少一个分组内不同PF的多个TRS的获得状态为部分可获得且部分不可获得，终端设备监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得。
在一可实现方式中，PEI的指示信息可以指示终端设备：监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且不基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且不基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，即至少一个分组内不同PF的多个PO的监听状态为部分监听且部分无需监听，至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS的获得状态为不可获得，终端设备监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得。
在一可实现方式中，PEI的指示信息可以指示终端设备：不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且不基于至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS进行辅助时频同步，即至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO的监听状态为无需监听，至少一个分组内不同PF的多个TRS的获得状态为部分可获得且部分不可获得，终端设备不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO且指示至少一个分组内不同PF的至少一个TRS不可获得。
在本实施例中，PEI的指示信息可跳跃指示：一个或多个分组内不同PF的至少一个PO进行监听、无需监听或者部分监听且部分无需监听，和/或，TRS可获得、TRS不可获得或者部分TRS可获得且部分不可获得，指示信息可以覆盖指示一个或多个PF中的PO监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态。PEI可位于同一分组中的首个PF中的每个PO之前，提供了PEI跳跃指示不同PF的至少一个PO的实现方式，节省了承载PEI的标识个数(如DCI bit或参考信号序列)，保证低寻呼率下终端设备可以更长时间处于休眠状态和/或可以更短时间进行PO解调，以降低功耗。
可选地，所述PEI包括：同一或不同DRX周期至少一个PF的至少一个PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态。
可选地，所述步骤A10包括以下至少一种：
若配置的DRX周期内的PF被配置为单一分组，则发送单一分组的首个PF中各PO前的PEI，指示单一分组的每个PF对应位置的PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态；
网络设备(如基站)发送PEI，终端设备逐个解析单一分组的首个PF中各PO前的PEI中指示信息，终端设备依据此解析的指示信息确定单一分组的每个PF对应位置的PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态。
若配置的DRX周期内的PF被配置为多个分组，则发送每个分组的首个PF中各PO前的PEI，分别指示每个分组的每个PF对应位置的PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态。可选地，监听状态包括监听、无需监听或者部分监听且部分无需监听，所述获得状态可以为可获得、均不可获得或者部分可获得且部分不可获得。
网络设备(如基站)发送PEI，终端设备按分组PF轮询，逐个解析各分组PF的首个PF中各PO前的PEI中指示信息，终端设备依据此解析的指示信息确定PEI所在分组的每个PF对应位置的PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态，即一个DRX周期内有多个分组PF，由每个分组PF中首个PF的各PO前PEI完成组内所有PF相同位置PO的PO是否监听寻呼消息和/或是否通过TRS进行时频同步进行指示。
可选地，所述步骤A10包括以下至少一种：
若配置的DRX周期内的PF被配置为单一分组，则发送单一分组的首个PF中各PO前的PEI中指示信息，指示单一分组的预定规则选定的非连续多个PF对应位置的PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态；
网络设备(如基站)发送PEI，终端设备逐个解析单一分组PF的首个PF中各PO前的PEI中指示信息，终端设备依据此解析的指示信息确定单一分组PF的预定规则选定的非连续多个PF对应位置的PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态。
若配置的DRX周期内的PF被配置为多个分组，则发送每个分组的首个PF中各PO前的PEI中指示信息，分别指示每个分组的预定规则选定的非连续多个PF对应位置的PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态。
在网络设备(如基站)发送PEI，终端设备按分组PF轮询，逐个解析各分组PF的首个PF中各PO前的PEI中指示信息，终端设备依据此解析的指示信息确定PEI所在分组PF的预定规则选定的非连续多个PF对应位置的PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态，即一个DRX周期内有多个分组PF，由每个分组PF中首个PF的各PO前PEI完成组内非连续多个PF相同位置的PO监听状态和/或PO对应位置的TRS的获得状态的指示。
可选地，预定规则可为以分组中PF序号的奇偶数选定、等差数列选定等确定非连续多个PF，区别于分组中连续的每个PF，预定规则选定非连续多个PF适用于单一分组和多个分组的情形。
在预设规则一可行方式中，预设规则为奇偶数选定方式，即在一个分组中选定序号为奇数或偶数的PF，解析此分组中首个PF前各PO前的PEI，确定序号为奇数或偶数的非连续的多个PF对应位置的PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态。
在一可选实施例中，预设规则为选定序号为奇数的非连续多个PF，参照图16，一个分组包括6个PF，每个PF有2个PO，分组中PF分别是PF0、PF1、PF2、PF3、PF4、PF5，此分组首位的PF0中PO0和PO1前的PEI跳跃指示PF1、PF3和PF5中对应位置的PO的监听状态和TRS的获得状态。需要注意的是，此可选实施例中，仅为预设规则选定非连续多个PF的一个详细解释，可以包括但不限于6个PF，也包括但不限于每个PF有2个PO。
可选地，预设规则可为选定序号为偶数的非连续多个PF，例如一个分组包括12个PF，分组中首个PF的PEI跳跃指示PF2、PF4、PF6、PF8、PF10和PF12对应位置的PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态。
可选地，预设规则可选定序号为等差数列每项值得非连续多个PF，例如，一个分组包括12个PF，等差数列为首项为0、公差为3的数列，等差数列为0、3、6、9、12，因此分组中首个PF的PEI跳跃指示PF3、PF6、PF9和PF12对应位置的PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态。
可选地，所述步骤A10包括：发送至少一个DRX周期的至少一组PF中对应的PO的PEI。
向终端设备发送至少一个DRX周期的至少一组PF中对应的PO的PEI。
网络设备发送PEI的过程可以包括以下至少一种：
若配置的DRX周期内的PF被配置为单一分组，则发送单一分组的首个PF中各PO前的PEI中指示信息，指示单一分组的预定规则选定的非连续多个PF对应位置的PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态；
若配置的DRX周期内的PF被配置为多个分组，则发送每个分组的首个PF中各PO前的PEI，分别指示每个分组的每个PF对应位置的PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态；
或者，
若配置的DRX周期内的PF被配置为单一分组，则发送单一分组的首个PF中各PO前的PEI中指示信息，指示单一分组的预定规则选定的非连续多个PF对应位置的PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态；
若配置的DRX周期内的PF被配置为多个分组，则发送每个分组的首个PF中各PO前的PEI中指示信息，分别指示每个分组的预定规则选定的非连续多个PF对应位置的PO的监听状态和/或TRS的获得状态。
在一实施例中，所述方法还包括以下至少一种：
在寻呼时机发送寻呼消息；
在寻呼时机发送跟踪参考信号；
在寻呼时机发送寻呼消息且发送跟踪参考信号；
在寻呼时机不发送寻呼消息；
在寻呼时机不发送跟踪参考信号；
在寻呼时机不发送寻呼消息且不发送跟踪参考信号；
在寻呼时机发送寻呼消息不发送跟踪参考信号；
在寻呼时机发送跟踪参考信号不发送寻呼消息。
网络设备在PO之前发送PEI，网络设备还包括以下至少一种：
网络设备在寻呼时机发送寻呼消息，以供终端设备根据PEI的指示信息的标识单元监听PO；
网络设备在寻呼时机发送TRS，以供终端设备根据PEI的指示信息的标识单元进行TRS同步；
网络设备在寻呼时机发送寻呼消息且发送TRS，以供终端设备根据PEI的指示信息的标识单元监听PO且做TRS同步；
网络设备在寻呼时机不发送寻呼消息，以供终端设备根据PEI的指示信息的标识单元不监听PO；
网络设备在寻呼时机不发送TRS，以供终端设备根据PEI的指示信息的标识单元不做TRS同步；
网络设备在寻呼时机不发送寻呼消息且不发送TRS，以供终端设备根据PEI的指示信息的标识单元不监听PO且不做TRS同步；
网络设备在寻呼时机发送寻呼消息不发送TRS，以供终端设备根据PEI的指示信息的标识单元监听PO且不做TRS同步；
网络设备发送TRS且在寻呼时机不发送寻呼消息，以供终端设备根据PEI的指示信息的标识单元不监听PO且做TRS同步。
关于网络设备配置PEI中的指示信息，以下辅以具体例子进行解释说明：
当PEI为DCI-based时，PEI中的多个bit位对应跳跃指示多个PF相同位置PO的监听状态，即若指示信息的标识单元(如一个bit位)为第一值(如1)，则此标识单元指示的PO的监听状态为监听，监听此标识单元指示的PO的PDCCH和/或PDSCH；若指示信息的标识单元(如一个bit位)为第二值(如0)，则此标识单元指示的PO的监听状态为不监听，不监听此标识单元指示的PO的PDCCH和/或PDSCH。
例如，PEI为0101，即指示信息的标识单元依次为0101，依次跳跃指示PF0、PF1、PF2和PF3中相同位置的PO1，则不监听PF0的PO1的PDCCH和/或PDSCH、监听PF1的PO1的PDCCH和/或PDSCH、不监听PF2的PO1的PDCCH和/或PDSCH、监听PF3的PO1的PDCCH和/或PDSCH。
可选地，当PEI的指示信息为参考信号序列时，参考信号序列的标识单元(如子序列)为第一值，则监听此标识单元指示的PO的PDCCH和/或PDSCH，为第二值，则不监听此标识单元指示的PO的PDCCH和/或PDSCH。
基于基本相同的原理，当PEI的TRS相关指示信息为DCI多个bit位时，指示信息的多个bit位对应跳跃指示多个PF相同位置PO对应TRS的获得状态，即若指示信息的标识单元(如一个bit位)为第一值(如1)，则此标识单元指示的PO对应TRS的获得状态为可获得，确定此标识单元指示的PO对应的TRS应用于PO解调前的辅助时频同步；和/或，若指示信息的标识单元(如一个bit位)为第二值(如0)，则此标识单元指示的PO对应TRS的获得状态为不可获得，确定此标识单元指示的PO对应的TRS不应用于PO解调前的辅助时频同步。
例如，PEI为0101，即指示信息的标识单元依次为0101，依次跳跃指示PF0、PF1、PF2和PF3中相同位置的TRS，则PF0的PO1对应的TRS不可获得、PF1的PO1对应的TRS可获得、PF2的PO1对应的TRS不可获得、PF3的PO1对应的TRS可获得。
可选地，当PEI的TRS相关指示信息为参考信号序列时，参考信号序列的标识单元(如子序列)为第一值，则此标识单元指示的PO对应的TRS可获得且可应用于PO解调前的时频同步；和/或，参考信号序列的标识单元(如子序列)为第二值，则此标识单元指示的PO对应的TRS不可获得。
当PEI的标识单元既用于指示PO的监听状态又用于指示TRS的获得状态，则PEI指示信息解释如下(以DCI-based PEI为例，Sequence-based PEI有相同解析)：
例如，PEI为01010001，即PO监听状态指示信息(即PO指示)的标识单元依次为0101，TRS获得状态指示信息(即TRS获得性指示)的标识单位为0001，PEI依次跳跃指示PF0、PF1、PF2和PF3中相同位置的PO1，则不监听PF0的PO1且PF0的PO1对应TRS不可获得、监听PF1的PO1且PF1的PO1对应TRS不可获得、不监听PF2的PO1且PF2的PO1对应TRS不可获得、监听PF3的PO1且PF3的PO1对应TRS可获得且可应用于PO解调前的辅助时频同步。
当DRX周期包含的PF中仅包含一个PO即Ns＝1，且PF个数比较少，比如PF个数为2，4，8等，则仅需在第一个PF的至少一个PO前放置一个承载TRS获得性指示(即TRS获得状态相关指示信息)的PEI，进行指示整个DRX周期内的TRS的获得状态。
当每个PO对应的TRS的获得性指示是随机的，且DRX周期内每个PF包含至少一个PO，DRX周期内PF个数比较多，比如每个DRX cycle内有128个PF等，则需要根据PEI可以表示的bit，对整个DRX周期内的PF进行分组，且仅在每组的第一个PF内的每个PO前放置PEI，用来指示整个分组的TRS的获得状态。
本申请中的PEI既可以用来仅指示PO的监听状态，也可以用来仅指示PO对应的TRS的获得状态，还可以用来既指示PO的监听状态又可以同时指示PO对应的TRS的获得状态。 参照图11a和图11b，给出PEI同时指示PO监听状态和TRS获得状态的技术方案，且实例以DCI-based为例，Sequence-based PEI的设计有相同技术方案。在一种技术方案实施例中，上述各实施例以及图5至图10的例子，给出了PEI仅指示PO监听状态或PEI仅指示PO的TRS获得状态的示意图，事实上PEI还可以用来同时指示PO监听状态和TRS获得状态，如图14至图16的例子。
TRS获得性指示的目的是为了使终端设备提前获知TRS是否存在，在需要进行PO解调时，用于辅助SSB实现更好的下行同步，进而确保PO解调的成功率。基于此，本专利还提出可以按照PEI中PO是否需要监听决定TRS获得性指示是否需要指示。即若PEI中指示PO监听状态的bit为0，即无需监听PO，则TRS获得性指示也无需占用bit，可以预设保留位替代，如此可以进一步节省PEI指示bit。设计方案同样适用于SSS-based或TRS-based PEI。
参照图11a，假设PEI指示里面PO指示的bit：0表示无需监听此PO，1表示需要监听此PO；PEI中的TRS获得性指示：0bit表示TRS不可获得，1表示TRS可获得，reserved bit(保留位)表示目前bit暂时无需占用。针对图11b中，仅在PO需要监听时，PEI中给出的TRS获得性指示才具有有效性，且图11b的bit设计是一个PO指示对应一个TRS获得性指示，但仅在PO指示bit为1时，TRS获得性指示才需要进行获得性和不可获得性的解析。
本申请还提供一种终端设备，所述终端设备包括：存储器和处理器，其中，所述存储器上存储有计算机程序，所述计算机程序被所述处理器执行时实现上述处理方法各实施例的步骤。
本申请还提供一种网络设备，所述网络设备包括：存储器和处理器，其中，所述存储器上存储有计算机程序，所述计算机程序被所述处理器执行时实现如上述的处理方法各实施例的步骤。
本申请还提供一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质上存储有计算机程序，所述计算机程序被处理器执行时实现上述处理方法的步骤。
在本申请提供的终端设备、网络设备和计算机可读存储介质的实施例中，可以包含任一上述处理方法实施例的全部技术特征，说明书拓展和解释内容与上述方法的各实施例基本相同，在此不做再赘述。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品，计算机程序产品包括计算机程序代码，当计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行如上各种可能的实施方式中的方法。
本申请实施例还提供一种芯片，包括存储器和处理器，存储器用于存储计算机程序，处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序，使得安装有芯片的设备执行如上各种可能的实施方式中的方法。
可以理解，上述场景仅是作为示例，并不构成对于本申请实施例提供的技术方案的应用场景的限定，本申请的技术方案还可应用于其他场景。例如，本领域普通技术人员可知，随着系统架构的演变和新业务场景的出现，本申请实施例提供的技术方案对于类似的技术问题，同样适用。
上述本申请实施例序号仅仅为了描述，不代表实施例的优劣。
本申请实施例方法中的步骤可以根据实际需要进行顺序调整、合并和删减。
本申请实施例设备中的单元可以根据实际需要进行合并、划分和删减。
在本申请中，对于相同或相似的术语概念、技术方案和/或应用场景描述，一般只在第一次出现时进行详细描述，后面再重复出现时，为了简洁，一般未再重复阐述，在理解本申请技术方案等内容时，对于在后未详细描述的相同或相似的术语概念、技术方案和/或应用场景描述等，可以参考其之前的相关详细描述。
在本申请中，对各个实施例的描述都各有侧重，某个实施例中没有详述或记载的部分，可以参见其它实施例的相关描述。
本申请技术方案的各技术特征可以进行任意的组合，为使描述简洁，未对上述实施例中的各个技术特征所有可能的组合都进行描述，然而，只要这些技术特征的组合不存在矛盾，都应当认为是本申请记载的范围。
通过以上的实施方式的描述，本领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到上述实施例方法可借助软件加必需的通用硬件平台的方式来实现，当然也可以通过硬件，但很多情况下前者是更佳的实施方式。基于这样的理解，本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来，该计算机软件产品存储在如上的一个存储介质(如ROM/RAM、磁碟、光盘)中，包括若干指令用以使得一台终端设备(可以是手机，计算机，服务器，被控终端，或者网络设备等)执行本申请每个实施例的方法。
在上述实施例中，可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时，可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行计算机程序指令时，全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例的流程或功能。计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络，或者其他可编程装置。计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中，或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输，例如，计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线)或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。可用介质可以是磁性介质，(例如，软盘、存储盘、磁带)、光介质(例如，DVD)，或者半导体介质(例如固态存储盘Solid State Disk(SSD))等。
以上仅为本发明的优选实施例，并非因此限制本发明的专利范围，凡是利用本发明说明书及附图内容所作的等效结构或等效流程变换，或直接或间接运用在其他相关的技术领域，均同理包括在本发明的专利保护范围内。

Claims (29)

  1. 一种处理方法，应用于终端设备，其特征在于，包括以下步骤：
    S10，接收寻呼提前指示；
    S20，根据所述寻呼提前指示指示至少一个寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机的监听状态和/或跟踪参考信号的获得状态；
    S30，根据所述监听状态确定是否监听寻呼消息，和/或，根据所述跟踪参考信号的获得状态确定是否通过跟踪参考信号进行时频同步。
  2. 如权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述步骤S10之前还包括：
    S00，确定至少一个非连续接收周期内至少一个分组的寻呼帧。
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述步骤S00包括：
    依据第一数目和/或第二数目，确定至少一个非连续接收周期内至少一个分组的寻呼帧。
  4. 根据权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述步骤S30，包括以下至少一种：
    指示至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号可获得；
    监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机；
    监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机且指示至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号可获得；
    指示至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号不可获得；
    不监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机；
    不监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机且指示至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号不可获得；
    监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机和不监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机；
    指示至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号可获得和指示至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号不可获得；
    监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机且指示至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机且指示至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号可获得；
    监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机且指示至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机且指示至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号不可获得；
    监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机且指示至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号不可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机且指示至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号可获得；
    监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机且指示至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号不可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机且指示至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号不可获得；
    不监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机且指示至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个 寻呼时机且指示至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号不可获得。
  5. 根据权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述步骤S20包括：
    S21，根据所述寻呼提前指示，确定同一或不同非连续接收周期至少一个寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机的监听状态和/或跟踪参考信号的获得状态。
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的方法，其特征在于，所述步骤S21包括以下至少一种：
    若配置的非连续接收周期内的寻呼帧被配置为单一分组，则解析单一分组的首个寻呼帧中各寻呼时机前的寻呼提前指示中指示信息，确定单一分组的每个寻呼帧对应位置的寻呼时机的监听状态和/或跟踪参考信号的获得状态；
    若配置的非连续接收周期内的寻呼帧被配置为多个分组，则解析每个分组的首个寻呼帧中各寻呼时机前的寻呼提前指示中指示信息，分别确定每个分组的每个寻呼帧对应位置的寻呼时机的监听状态和/或跟踪参考信号的获得状态。
  7. 根据权利要求5所述的方法，其特征在于，所述步骤S21包括以下至少一种：
    若配置的非连续接收周期内的寻呼帧被配置为单一分组，则解析单一分组的首个寻呼帧中各寻呼时机前的寻呼提前指示中指示信息，确定单一分组的预定规则选定的非连续多个寻呼帧对应位置的寻呼时机的监听状态和/或跟踪参考信号的获得状态；
    若配置的非连续接收周期内的寻呼帧被配置为多个分组，则解析每个分组的首个寻呼帧中各寻呼时机前的寻呼提前指示中指示信息，分别确定每个分组的预定规则选定的非连续多个寻呼帧对应位置的寻呼时机的监听状态和/或跟踪参考信号的获得状态。
  8. 根据权利要求2至7中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述步骤S10包括：
    接收至少一个非连续接收周期的至少一组寻呼帧中对应的寻呼时机的寻呼提前指示。
  9. 根据权利要求1至7中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述步骤S30，包括以下至少一种：
    响应于所述寻呼提前指示中的指示信息标识单元监听寻呼时机；
    响应于所述寻呼提前指示中的指示信息标识单元做跟踪参考信号同步；
    响应于所述寻呼提前指示中的指示信息标识单元监听寻呼时机且做跟踪参考信号同步；
    响应于所述寻呼提前指示中的指示信息标识单元不监听寻呼时机；
    响应于所述寻呼提前指示中的指示信息标识单元不做跟踪参考信号同步；
    响应于所述寻呼提前指示中的指示信息标识单元不监听寻呼时机且不做跟踪参考信号同步。
  10. 一种处理方法，应用于终端设备，其特征在于，包括以下步骤：
    S100，若分组信息及指示信息满足预设条件，则根据所述分组信息和指示信息，确定至少一个分组的寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机的监听状态和/或跟踪参考信号的获得状态；
    S200，根据所述监听状态确定是否监听寻呼消息，和/或，根据所述跟踪参考信号的获得状态确定是否通过跟踪参考信号进行时频同步。
  11. 如权利要求10所述的方法，其特征在于，所述分组信息的确定或生成方式，包括以下至少一种：
    确定至少一个非连续接收周期内至少一个分组的寻呼帧；
    根据第一数目和/或第二数目，生成至少一个非连续接收周期内至少一个分组的寻呼帧。
  12. 根据权利要10所述的方法，其特征在于，所述满足预设条件，包括以下至少一种：
    所述指示信息指示的至少一个寻呼帧存在于所述至少一个分组；
    承载所述指示信息的寻呼提前指示位于同一分组中的首个寻呼帧中的对应寻呼时机之前。
  13. 根据权利要求10所述的方法，其特征在于，所述步骤S200，包括以下至少一种：
    指示至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号可获得；
    监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机；
    监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机且指示至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号可获得；
    指示至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号不可获得；
    不监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机；
    不监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机且指示至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号不可获得；
    监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机和不监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机；
    指示至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号可获得和指示至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号不可获得；
    监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机且指示至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机且指示至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号可获得；
    监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机且指示至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机且指示至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号不可获得；
    监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机且指示至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号不可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机且指示至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号可获得；
    监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机且指示至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号不可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机且指示至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号不可获得；
    不监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机且指示至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机且指示至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号不可获得。
  14. 根据权利要求10至13中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述步骤S100包括：
    S101，根据所述分组信息，确定至少一个非连续接收周期内至少一个分组的寻呼帧；
    S102，根据所述指示信息，确定同一或不同非连续接收周期处于至少一个分组的至少一个寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机的监听状态和/或跟踪参考信号的获得状态。
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的方法，其特征在于，所述步骤S102包括以下至少一种：
    若配置的非连续接收周期内的寻呼帧被配置为单一分组，则解析单一分组的首个寻呼帧中各寻呼时机前的寻呼提前指示中指示信息，确定单一分组的每个寻呼帧对应位置的寻呼时机的监听状态和/或跟踪参考信号的获得状态；
    若配置的非连续接收周期内的寻呼帧被配置为多个分组，则解析每个分组的首个寻呼帧中各寻呼时机前的寻呼提前指示中指示信息，分别确定每个分组的每个寻呼帧对应位置的寻呼时机的监听状态和/或跟踪参考信号的获得状态。
  16. 根据权利要求14所述的方法，其特征在于，所述步骤S102包括以下至少一种：
    若配置的非连续接收周期内的寻呼帧被配置为单一分组，则解析单一分组的首个寻呼帧中各寻呼时机前的寻呼提前指示中指示信息，确定单一分组的预定规则选定的非连续多个寻呼帧对应位置的寻呼时机的监听状态和/或跟踪参考信号的获得状态；
    若配置的非连续接收周期内的寻呼帧被配置为多个分组，则解析每个分组的首个寻呼帧中各寻呼时机前的寻呼提前指示中指示信息，分别确定每个分组的预定规则选定的非连续多个寻呼帧对应位置的寻呼时机的监听状态和/或跟踪参考信号的获得状态。
  17. 根据权利要求10至13中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述步骤S200，包括以下至少一种：
    响应于所述指示信息标识单元监听寻呼时机；
    响应于所述指示信息标识单元做跟踪参考信号同步；
    响应于所述指示信息标识单元监听寻呼时机且做跟踪参考信号同步；
    响应于所述指示信息标识单元不监听寻呼时机；
    响应于所述指示信息标识单元不做跟踪参考信号同步；
    响应于所述指示信息标识单元不监听寻呼时机且不做跟踪参考信号同步。
  18. 一种处理方法，应用于网络设备，其特征在于，包括以下步骤：
    A10，向终端设备发送寻呼提前指示，以使所述终端设备根据所述寻呼提前指示中的指示信息确定至少一个寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机的监听状态和/或跟踪参考信号的获得状态；
    所述监听状态用于指示确定是否监听寻呼消息，和/或，所述跟踪参考信号的获得状态用于指示确定是否通过跟踪参考信号进行时频同步。
  19. 如权利要求18所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述步骤A10之前还包括：
    A00，确定至少一个非连续接收周期的分组状态。
  20. 根据权利要求19所述的方法，其特征在于，所述步骤A00包括：
    依据第一数目和/或第二数目，确定至少一个非连续接收周期内至少一个分组的寻呼帧。
  21. 根据权利要求19所述的方法，其特征在于，所述指示信息用于指示以下至少一种情形：
    指示至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号可获得；
    监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机；
    监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机且指示至少一个分组内不同寻 呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号可获得；
    指示至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号不可获得；
    不监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机；
    不监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机且指示至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号不可获得；
    监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机和不监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机；
    指示至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号可获得和指示至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号不可获得；
    监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机且指示至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机且指示至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号可获得；
    监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机且指示至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机且指示至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号不可获得；
    监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机且指示至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号不可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机且指示至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号可获得；
    监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机且指示至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号不可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机且指示至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号不可获得；
    不监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机且指示至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号可获得和不监听至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机且指示至少一个分组内不同寻呼帧的至少一个跟踪参考信号不可获得。
  22. 根据权利要求19所述的方法，其特征在于，所述寻呼提前指示包括：
    同一或不同非连续接收周期至少一个寻呼帧的至少一个寻呼时机的监听状态和/或跟踪参考信号的获得状态。
  23. 根据权利要求22所述的方法，其特征在于，所述步骤A10包括以下至少一种：
    若配置的非连续接收周期内的寻呼帧被配置为单一分组，则发送单一分组的首个寻呼帧中各寻呼时机前的寻呼提前指示，指示单一分组的每个寻呼帧对应位置的寻呼时机的监听状态和/或跟踪参考信号的获得状态；
    若配置的非连续接收周期内的寻呼帧被配置为多个分组，则发送每个分组的首个寻呼帧中各寻呼时机前的寻呼提前指示，分别指示每个分组的每个寻呼帧对应位置的寻呼时机的监听状态和/或跟踪参考信号的获得状态。
  24. 根据权利要求22所述的方法，其特征在于，所述步骤A10包括以下至少一种：
    若配置的非连续接收周期内的寻呼帧被配置为单一分组，则发送单一分组的首个寻呼帧中各寻呼时机前的寻呼提前指示，指示单一分组的预定规则选定的非连续多个寻呼帧对应位置的寻呼时机的监听状态和/或跟踪参考信号的获得状态；
    若配置的非连续接收周期内的寻呼帧被配置为多个分组，则发送每个分组的首个寻呼帧中各寻呼时机前的寻呼提前指示，分别指示每个分组的预定规则选定的非连续多个寻呼帧对应位置的寻呼时机的监听状态和/或跟踪参考信号的获得状态。
  25. 根据权利要求19至24中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述步骤A10包括：
    发送至少一个非连续接收周期的至少一组寻呼帧中对应的寻呼时机的寻呼提前指示。
  26. 根据权利要求18至24中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法包括以下至少一种：
    在寻呼时机发送寻呼消息；
    在寻呼时机发送跟踪参考信号；
    在寻呼时机发送寻呼消息且发送跟踪参考信号；
    在寻呼时机不发送寻呼消息；
    在寻呼时机不发送跟踪参考信号；
    在寻呼时机不发送寻呼消息且不发送跟踪参考信号；
    在寻呼时机发送寻呼消息不发送跟踪参考信号；
    在寻呼时机发送跟踪参考信号不发送寻呼消息。
  27. 一种终端设备，其特征在于，所述终端设备包括：存储器和处理器，其中，所述存储器上存储有计算机程序，所述计算机程序被所述处理器执行时实现如权利要求1至17中任一项所述的处理方法的步骤。
  28. 一种网络设备，其特征在于，所述网络设备包括：存储器和处理器，其中，所述存储器上存储有计算机程序，所述计算机程序被所述处理器执行时实现如权利要求18至26中任一项所述的处理方法的步骤。
  29. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其特征在于，所述计算机可读存储介质上存储有计算机程序，所述计算机程序被处理器执行时实现如权利要求1至26中任一项所述的处理方法的步骤。
PCT/CN2021/110634 2021-08-04 2021-08-04 处理方法、终端设备、网络设备及存储介质 WO2023010349A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2021/110634 WO2023010349A1 (zh) 2021-08-04 2021-08-04 处理方法、终端设备、网络设备及存储介质
EP21937193.7A EP4156798A4 (en) 2021-08-04 2021-08-04 PROCESSING METHOD, TERMINAL DEVICE, NETWORK DEVICE AND STORAGE MEDIUM
CN202180012013.9A CN115053574A (zh) 2021-08-04 2021-08-04 处理方法、终端设备、网络设备及存储介质

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2021/110634 WO2023010349A1 (zh) 2021-08-04 2021-08-04 处理方法、终端设备、网络设备及存储介质

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2023010349A1 true WO2023010349A1 (zh) 2023-02-09

Family

ID=83156332

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2021/110634 WO2023010349A1 (zh) 2021-08-04 2021-08-04 处理方法、终端设备、网络设备及存储介质

Country Status (3)

Country Link
EP (1) EP4156798A4 (zh)
CN (1) CN115053574A (zh)
WO (1) WO2023010349A1 (zh)

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN112399529A (zh) * 2019-08-15 2021-02-23 华为技术有限公司 一种通信方法及相关设备
CN113163476A (zh) * 2021-01-15 2021-07-23 中兴通讯股份有限公司 信号发送和接收方法、装置、设备和存储介质
CN113170282A (zh) * 2021-02-26 2021-07-23 北京小米移动软件有限公司 寻呼早期指示指示方法、装置、通信设备和存储介质

Family Cites Families (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN113273285A (zh) * 2019-01-11 2021-08-17 苹果公司 用于ue辅助反馈的信令机制的系统和方法
CN112673685B (zh) * 2020-12-17 2023-04-11 北京小米移动软件有限公司 信息传输方法、装置、通信设备和存储介质

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN112399529A (zh) * 2019-08-15 2021-02-23 华为技术有限公司 一种通信方法及相关设备
CN113163476A (zh) * 2021-01-15 2021-07-23 中兴通讯股份有限公司 信号发送和接收方法、装置、设备和存储介质
CN113170282A (zh) * 2021-02-26 2021-07-23 北京小米移动软件有限公司 寻呼早期指示指示方法、装置、通信设备和存储介质

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
See also references of EP4156798A4 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP4156798A4 (en) 2024-05-29
EP4156798A1 (en) 2023-03-29
CN115053574A (zh) 2022-09-13

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2018040039A1 (zh) 一种小数据的传输方法、相关设备及系统
WO2020253612A1 (zh) Pdcch监听方法和终端
US9668294B2 (en) Method and apparatus for bluetooth low energy suspend and resume
US20240073836A1 (en) Method for transmitting information , communication device, and storage medium
WO2021129508A1 (zh) 唤醒信号处理方法、唤醒信号配置方法及相关设备
JP2017507586A (ja) ウェイクアップメッセージを使用する近隣認識ネットワーク（ｎａｎ）の発見
CN113038634B (zh) 唤醒信号配置方法、唤醒信号处理方法及相关设备
WO2021129504A1 (zh) Scell休眠指示处理方法、终端及网络设备
WO2018126409A1 (zh) 一种信令传输方法及设备
WO2021217488A1 (zh) 寻呼处理方法、装置、通信设备及存储介质
WO2018027821A1 (zh) 一种通信方法、相关设备及系统
WO2021180197A1 (zh) 传输配置方法及电子设备
WO2020083348A1 (zh) 一种带宽部分的配置方法及装置
WO2023082688A1 (zh) 寻呼周期更新方法、通信设备、通信系统及存储介质
WO2018126407A1 (zh) 一种数据传输方法及设备
WO2023082603A1 (zh) 提醒方法、终端设备、网络设备及存储介质
WO2023010349A1 (zh) 处理方法、终端设备、网络设备及存储介质
WO2021228074A1 (zh) 信息检测、发送方法、终端及网络侧设备
WO2021164681A1 (zh) 解码方法、解码配置方法、终端及网络侧设备
CN112425211B (zh) 通信方法及装置、网络设备、用户设备及存储介质
WO2022147730A1 (zh) 省电信号的处理方法及装置、通信设备及存储介质
WO2022198570A1 (zh) 信号处理方法、设备及存储介质
WO2022126457A1 (zh) 一种寻呼方法、终端设备及网络设备
WO2022198520A1 (zh) 信息处理方法、设备及存储介质
WO2022134073A1 (zh) 确定寻呼周期的方法及终端设备

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2021937193

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20221025

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE